R&S ZVB Operating Manual
  1. Manuals
  2. Brands
  3. R&S Manuals
  4. Measuring Instruments
  5. ZVB
  6. Operating manual

R&S ZVB Operating Manual

Vector network analyzer
Hide thumbs
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
22
23
24
25
Table Of Contents
26
27
28
29
30
31
32
33
34
35
36
37
38
39
40
41
42
43
44
45
46
47
48
49
50
51
52
53
54
55
56
57
58
59
60
61
62
63
64
65
66
67
68
69
70
71
72
73
74
75
76
77
78
79
80
81
82
83
84
85
86
87
88
89
90
91
92
93
94
95
96
97
98
99
100
101
102
103
104
105
106
107
108
109
110
111
112
113
114
115
116
117
118
119
120
121
122
123
124
125
126
127
128
129
130
131
132
133
134
135
136
137
138
139
140
141
142
143
144
145
146
147
148
149
150
151
152
153
154
155
156
157
158
159
160
161
162
163
164
165
166
167
168
169
170
171
172
173
174
175
176
177
178
179
180
181
182
183
184
185
186
187
188
189
190
191
192
193
194
195
196
197
198
199
200
201
202
203
204
205
206
207
208
209
210
211
212
213
214
215
216
217
218
219
220
221
222
223
224
225
226
227
228
229
230
231
232
233
234
235
236
237
238
239
240
241
242
243
244
245
246
247
248
249
250
251
252
253
254
255
256
257
258
259
260
261
262
263
264
265
266
267
268
269
270
271
272
273
274
275
276
277
278
279
280
281
282
283
284
285
286
287
288
289
290
291
292
293
294
295
296
297
298
299
300
301
302
303
304
305
306
307
308
309
310
311
312
313
314
315
316
317
318
319
320
321
322
323
324
325
326
327
328
329
330
331
332
333
334
335
336
337
338
339
340
341
342
343
344
345
346
347
348
349
350
351
352
353
354
355
356
357
358
359
360
361
362
363
364
365
366
367
368
369
370
371
372
373
374
375
376
377
378
379
380
381
382
383
384
385
386
387
388
389
390
391
392
393
394
395
396
397
398
399
400
401
402
403
404
405
406
407
408
409
410
411
412
413
414
415
416
417
418
419
420
421
422
423
424
425
426
427
428
429
430
431
432
433
434
435
436
437
438
439
440
441
442
443
444
445
446
447
448
449
450
451
452
453
454
455
456
457
458
459
460
461
462
463
464
465
466
467
468
469
470
471
472
473
474
475
476
477
478
479
480
481
482
483
484
485
486
487
488
489
490
491
492
493
494
495
496
497
498
499
500
501
502
503
504
505
506
507
508
509
510
511
512
513
514
515
516
517
518
519
520
521
522
523
524
525
526
527
528
529
530
531
532
533
534
535
536
537
538
539
540
541
542
543
544
545
546
547
548
549
550
551
552
553
554
555
556
557
558
559
560
561
562
563
564
565
566
567
568
569
570
571
572
573
574
575
576
577
578
579
580
581
582
583
584
585
586
587
588
589
590
591
592
593
594
595
596
597
598
599
600
601
602
603
604
605
606
607
608
609
610
611
612
613
614
615
616
617
618
619
620
621
622
623
624
625
626
627
628
629
630
631
632
633
634
635
636
637
638
639
640
641
642
643
644
645
646
647
648
649
650
651
652
653
654
655
656
657
658
659
660
661
662
663
664
665
666
667
668
669
670
671
672
673
674
675
676
677
678
679
680
681
682
683
684
685
686
687
688
689
690
691
692
693
694
695
696
697
698
699
700
701
702
703
704
705
706
707
708
709
710
711
712
713
714
715
716
717
718
719
720
721
722
723
724
725
726
727
728
729
730
731
732
733
734
735
736
737
738
739
740
741
742
743
744
745
746
747
748
749
750
751
752
753
754
755
756
757
758
759
760
761
762
763
764
765
766
767
768
769
770
771
772
773
774
775
776
777
778
779
780
781
782
783
784
785
786
787
788
789
790
791
792
793
794
795
796
797
798
799
800
801
802
803
804
805
806
807
808
809
810
811
812
813
814
815
816
817
818
819
820
821
822
823
824
825
826
827
828
829
830
831
832
833
834
835
836
837
838
839
840
841
842
843
844
845
846
847
848
849
850
851
852
853
854
855
856
857
858
859
860
861
862
863
864
865
866
867
868
869
870
871
872
873
874
875
876
877
878
879
880
881
882
883
884
885
886
887
888
889
890
891
892
893
894
895
896
897
898
899
900
901
902
903
904
905
906
907
908
909
910
911
912
913
914
915
916
917
918
919
920
921
922
923
924
925
926
927
928
929
930
931
932
933
934
935
936
937
938
939
940
941
942
943
944
945
946
947
948
949
950
951
952
953
954
955
956
957
958
959
960
961
962
963
964
965
966
967
968
969
970
971
972
973
974
975
976
977
978
979
980
981
982
983
984
985
986
987
988
989
990
Table of Contents

Advertisement

Quick Links

Download this manual
®
®
®
R&S
ZVA / R&S
ZVB / R&S
ZVT
Vector Network Analyzers
Operating Manual
(;]:â<)
1145.1084.12 ─ 30

Advertisement

Table of Contents
loading
Need help?

Need help?

Do you have a question about the ZVB and is the answer not in the manual?

Questions and answers

Subscribe to Our Youtube Channel

Related Manuals for R&S ZVB

Summary of Contents for R&S ZVB

  • Page 1 ® ® ® R&S ZVA / R&S ZVB / R&S Vector Network Analyzers Operating Manual (;]:â<) 1145.1084.12 ─ 30...
  • Page 2 ® ® This Operating Manual describes all R&S ZVA, R&S ZVB, and R&S ZVT vector network analyzer types. Refer to the product brochures for detailed ordering information. © 2016 Rohde & Schwarz GmbH & Co. KG Mühldorfstr. 15, 81671 München, Germany...

  • Page 3: Basic Safety Instructions

    Basic Safety Instructions Always read through and comply with the following safety instructions! All plants and locations of the Rohde & Schwarz group of companies make every effort to keep the safety standards of our products up to date and to offer our customers the highest possible degree of safety. Our products and the auxiliary equipment they require are designed, built and tested in accordance with the safety standards that apply in each case.
  • Page 4 Basic Safety Instructions Symbol Meaning Symbol Meaning Caution ! Hot surface Alternating current (AC) Protective conductor terminal Direct/alternating current (DC/AC) To identify any terminal which is intended for connection to an external conductor for protection against electric shock in case of a fault, or the terminal of a protective earth Earth (Ground) Class II Equipment...
  • Page 5 Basic Safety Instructions Operating states and operating positions The product may be operated only under the operating conditions and in the positions specified by the manufacturer, without the product's ventilation being obstructed. If the manufacturer's specifications are not observed, this can result in electric shock, fire and/or serious personal injury or death. Applicable local or national safety regulations and rules for the prevention of accidents must be observed in all work performed.
  • Page 6 Basic Safety Instructions 6. The product may be operated only from TN/TT supply networks fuse-protected with max. 16 A (higher fuse only after consulting with the Rohde & Schwarz group of companies). 7. Do not insert the plug into sockets that are dusty or dirty. Insert the plug firmly and all the way into the socket provided for this purpose.
  • Page 7 Basic Safety Instructions 2. Before you move or transport the product, read and observe the section titled "Transport". 3. As with all industrially manufactured goods, the use of substances that induce an allergic reaction (allergens) such as nickel cannot be generally excluded. If you develop an allergic reaction (such as a skin rash, frequent sneezing, red eyes or respiratory difficulties) when using a Rohde &...
  • Page 8 Basic Safety Instructions 2. Adjustments, replacement of parts, maintenance and repair may be performed only by electrical experts authorized by Rohde & Schwarz. Only original parts may be used for replacing parts relevant to safety (e.g. power switches, power transformers, fuses). A safety test must always be performed after parts relevant to safety have been replaced (visual inspection, protective conductor test, insulation resistance measurement, leakage current measurement, functional test).
  • Page 9 Instrucciones de seguridad elementales 3. If you use the product in a vehicle, it is the sole responsibility of the driver to drive the vehicle safely and properly. The manufacturer assumes no responsibility for accidents or collisions. Never use the product in a moving vehicle if doing so could distract the driver of the vehicle.
  • Page 10 Instrucciones de seguridad elementales Además queda en la responsabilidad del usuario utilizar el producto en la forma debida. Este producto está destinado exclusivamente al uso en la industria y el laboratorio o, si ha sido expresamente autorizado, para aplicaciones de campo y de ninguna manera deberá ser utilizado de modo que alguna persona/cosa pueda sufrir daño.
  • Page 11 Instrucciones de seguridad elementales Símbolo Significado Símbolo Significado Conexión a tierra El aparato está protegido en su totalidad por un aislamiento doble (reforzado) Conexión a masa Distintivo de la UE para baterías y acumuladores Más información en la sección "Eliminación/protección del medio ambiente", punto 1.
  • Page 12 Instrucciones de seguridad elementales Estados operativos y posiciones de funcionamiento El producto solamente debe ser utilizado según lo indicado por el fabricante respecto a los estados operativos y posiciones de funcionamiento sin que se obstruya la ventilación. Si no se siguen las indicaciones del fabricante, pueden producirse choques eléctricos, incendios y/o lesiones graves con posible consecuencia de muerte.
  • Page 13 Instrucciones de seguridad elementales integran productos sin interruptor en bastidores o instalaciones, se deberá colocar el interruptor en el nivel de la instalación. 5. No utilice nunca el producto si está dañado el cable de conexión a red. Compruebe regularmente el correcto estado de los cables de conexión a red.
  • Page 14 Instrucciones de seguridad elementales 17. No utilice el producto en condiciones en las que pueda producirse o ya se hayan producido condensaciones sobre el producto o en el interior de éste, como p. ej. al desplazarlo de un lugar frío a otro caliente.
  • Page 15 Instrucciones de seguridad elementales pueden causar perturbaciones radioeléctricas en entornos residenciales debido a posibles perturbaciones guiadas o radiadas. En este caso, se le podrá solicitar al operador que tome las medidas adecuadas para eliminar estas perturbaciones.  Aparato de clase B: Aparato adecuado para su uso en entornos residenciales, así...
  • Page 16 Instrucciones de seguridad elementales 8. En caso de devolver baterías de litio a las filiales de Rohde & Schwarz, debe cumplirse las normativas sobre los modos de transporte (IATA-DGR, código IMDG, ADR, RID). Transporte 1. El producto puede tener un peso elevado. Por eso es necesario desplazarlo o transportarlo con precaución y, si es necesario, usando un sistema de elevación adecuado (p.
  • Page 17 Customer Support Technical support – where and when you need it For quick, expert help with any Rohde & Schwarz equipment, contact one of our Customer Support Centers. A team of highly qualified engineers provides telephone support and will work with you to find a solution to your query on any aspect of the operation, programming or applications of Rohde &...

  • Page 18: Preface

    To check your vector network analyzer firmware version, click Help – About NWA... 1.2 R&S ZVA/ZVB/ZVT Documentation Map The R&S ZVA/ZVB/ZVT documentation is delivered as a help system, a printed Get- ting Started guide and on CD-ROM. Operating Manual 1145.1084.12 ─ 30...
  • Page 19 1.2.2 Getting Started Guide The Getting Started guide describes everything that is needed to put the instrument into operation and helps you to get familiar with the R&S ZVA/ZVB/ZVT. It gives an introduction to the instrument's functionality and provides procedures for typical mea- surement tasks.

  • Page 20: Glossary: Frequently Used Terms

    Glossary: Frequently Used Terms R&S ZVA / R&S ZVB / R&S Glossary: Frequently Used Terms Active channel: Channel belonging to the active trace. The active channel is highligh- ted in the channel list below the diagram. The active channel is not relevant in remote control where each channel can contain an active trace.
  • Page 21 Glossary: Frequently Used Terms R&S ZVA / R&S ZVB / R&S settings complement the definitions of the Trace menu; they apply to all traces assigned to the channel. Compression point: The x-dB compression point of an S-parameter or ratio is the stimulus signal level where the magnitude of the measured quantity has dropped by x dB compared to its value at small stimulus signal levels (small-signal value).
  • Page 22 Glossary: Frequently Used Terms R&S ZVA / R&S ZVB / R&S Harmonic distortion: The production of harmonic frequencies (harmonics) by an elec- tronic system when a signal is applied at the input. Harmonic grid: A set of equidistant frequency points fi (i = 1...n) with spacing Delta(f) and the additional condition that f1 = Delta(f).
  • Page 23 (from a local oscillator, LO) is applied to the RF mixer's LO port, resulting in an output signal at the mixer's Intermediate Frequency (IF) port. NWA: (Vector) Network Analyzer, in particular the R&S ZVA/ZVB/ZVT. Partial measurement: Measurement at a specified stimulus value maintaining definite hardware settings.
  • Page 24 Glossary: Frequently Used Terms R&S ZVA / R&S ZVB / R&S Reverse: A measurement on a two-port DUT is said to be in reverse direction if the source signal (stimulus) is applied to port 2 of the DUT. Setup: A setup comprises a set of diagram areas with all displayed information that can be stored to a NWA setup file (*.zvx).
  • Page 25 Glossary: Frequently Used Terms R&S ZVA / R&S ZVB / R&S Topology: Assignment of the physical ports of the NWA to the logical ports used for the measurement of mixed mode S-parameters (balance-unbalance conversion). TOSM: A calibration type using a Through plus the one-port standards Open, Short, Match, to be connected to each calibrated port.

  • Page 26: Table Of Contents

    ZVB / R&S Contents Contents 1 Preface ........................3 New Features in this Revision ......................3 R&S ZVA/ZVB/ZVT Documentation Map ...................3 2 Glossary: Frequently Used Terms ................. 5 3 System Overview ....................19 Basic Concepts ..........................19 Global Resources ........................19 Setups ............................
  • Page 27 ® ® ® R&S ZVA / R&S ZVB / R&S Contents Vector Mixer Measurement (R&S ZVA-K5) ................64 True Differential Mode (R&S ZVA-K6) ..................64 Measurements on Pulsed Signals (R&S ZVA-K7) ..............65 Converter Control (R&S ZVA-K8) .................... 65 Mixer Delay Measurements (R&S ZVA-K9 / -K10) ..............65 Pulse Generator (R&S ZVA-K27).....................
  • Page 28 ® ® ® R&S ZVA / R&S ZVB / R&S Contents Restore ............................. 95 Move ............................96 Size ............................96 Minimize ........................... 96 Maximize ..........................96 Close ............................96 Next ............................96 File Menu ............................96 New ............................97 Close ............................98 Print ............................
  • Page 29 ® ® ® R&S ZVA / R&S ZVB / R&S Contents Calibration State Labels ......................493 Channel - Offset ........................495 Display Menu ..........................504 Display - Area Select ......................504 Display Config ........................513 System Menu ..........................517 System Configuration ......................518 System Config ........................
  • Page 30 ® ® ® R&S ZVA / R&S ZVB / R&S Contents Combining Manual and Remote Control ................580 Messages ............................581 Device Messages (Commands and Device Responses) ............581 SCPI Command Structure and Syntax .................. 582 SCPI Parameters ........................585 Basic Remote Control Concepts ....................
  • Page 31 ® ® ® R&S ZVA / R&S ZVB / R&S Contents FORMat..........................753 HCOPy........................... 754 INITiate<Ch>.......................... 760 INPut............................761 INSTrument..........................762 MEMory..........................763 MMEMory..........................765 OUTPut..........................799 PROGram..........................805 ROUTe<Ch>.......................... 809 [SENSe...] ..........................
  • Page 32 LAN Interface ........................1137 RSIB Interface Functions ..................... 1139 IEC/IEEE Bus Interface ......................1146 Universal Interface ....................... 1150 Universal Interface (R&S ZVA and R&S ZVB) ................1150 Control Signals ........................1150 Data Ports ..........................1151 Universal Interface Connector ....................1152 Timing of Control Signals .....................
  • Page 33 ® ® ® R&S ZVA / R&S ZVB / R&S System Overview Basic Concepts Operating Manual 1145.1084.12 – 30...

  • Page 34: System Overview

    ® ® ® R&S ZVA / R&S ZVB / R&S System Overview Basic Concepts 3 System Overview The following chapter provides an overview of the analyzer's capabilities and their use. This includes a description of the basic concepts that the analyzer uses to organize, process and display measurement data, of the screen contents, possible measured quantities, calibration methods and typical test setups.

  • Page 35: Setups

    ® ® ® R&S ZVA / R&S ZVB / R&S System Overview Basic Concepts delete or reset global resource data using the Resets tab in the System Config dialog. Setups A setup comprises a set of diagram areas with all displayed information that can be stored to a NWA setup file (*.zvx) and reused.

  • Page 36: Data Flow

    ® ® ® R&S ZVA / R&S ZVB / R&S System Overview Basic Concepts Trace Settings The trace settings specify the mathematical operations used in order to obtain traces from the measured or stored data. They can be divided into several main groups: ...
  • Page 37 ® ® ® R&S ZVA / R&S ZVB / R&S System Overview Basic Concepts All stages are described in detail in the GUI Reference chapter. Operating Manual 1145.1084.12 – 30...

  • Page 38: Screen Elements

    ® ® ® R&S ZVA / R&S ZVB / R&S System Overview Screen Elements Screen Elements This section describes the operating concept of the network analyzer, including the alternative navigation tools for mouse and hardkey operation, the trace settings, markers and diagram areas. For a description...

  • Page 39: Menu Structure

    ® ® ® R&S ZVA / R&S ZVB / R&S System Overview Screen Elements  With a combination of the previous methods, using the hardkey bar (front panel key bar, activated via Display – Config./View). The active menu is the menu containing the last executed command. If the...
  • Page 40 ® ® ® R&S ZVA / R&S ZVB / R&S System Overview Screen Elements Example: More S-Parameters... opens a dialog to select S-parameters for multiport measurements or mixed mode S-parameters.  A menu command with no arrow or dots directly initiates an action. Example: S21 selects the forward transmission coefficient S as measured quantity.
  • Page 41 ® ® ® R&S ZVA / R&S ZVB / R&S System Overview Screen Elements visible for a period of time sufficient to select the next instrument function. Hardkey Bar The hardkey bar (front panel key bar, Display – Config./View) represents the most commonly used front panel keys of the analyzer.

  • Page 42: Display Elements In The Diagram Area

    ® ® ® R&S ZVA / R&S ZVB / R&S System Overview Screen Elements Display Elements in the Diagram Area The central part of the screen is occupied by one or several diagram areas. Diagram Areas A diagram area is a rectangular portion of the screen used to display traces. Diagram areas are arranged in windows;...
  • Page 43 ® ® ® R&S ZVA / R&S ZVB / R&S System Overview Screen Elements Traces A trace is a set of data points displayed together in the diagram area. The individual data points are connected so that each trace forms a continuous line.
  • Page 44 ® ® ® R&S ZVA / R&S ZVB / R&S System Overview Screen Elements The trace type of each trace in a diagram area is indicated in the trace list. You can also make each trace Invisible without deleting it.
  • Page 45 ® ® ® R&S ZVA / R&S ZVB / R&S System Overview Screen Elements Context menus of the trace list A right mouse click on the trace name, the measured quantity, and the format and scale section of the trace list opens the following...
  • Page 46 ® ® ® R&S ZVA / R&S ZVB / R&S System Overview Screen Elements  Mkr 1 indicates the maximum (minimum) of the peak.  Mkr 2 and Mkr 3 indicate the lower and upper band edge where the trace value has decreased (increased) by a definite Level value.
  • Page 47 ® ® ® R&S ZVA / R&S ZVB / R&S System Overview Screen Elements  The active marker has a dot placed in front of the marker line.  A Δ sign placed in front of the marker line indicates that the marker is in Delta Mode.
  • Page 48 ® ® R&S ZVA / R&S ZVB / R&S System Overview Screen Elements Each line in the channel list describes a single channel. The channel of the active trace is highlighted. The lines are divided into several sections with the following contents (from left to right): ...

  • Page 49: Dialogs

    ® ® ® R&S ZVA / R&S ZVB / R&S System Overview Screen Elements Context Menus To provide access to the most common tasks and speed up the operation, the analyzer offers context menus (right-click menus) for the following display elements: ...
  • Page 50 ® ® ® R&S ZVA / R&S ZVB / R&S System Overview Screen Elements The two types of dialogs are easy to distinguish:  Dialogs with immediate settings provide a Close button but no OK button. Example: Step Size dialog.

  • Page 51: Display Formats And Diagram Types

    ® ® ® R&S ZVA / R&S ZVB / R&S System Overview Screen Elements  Auto activates the default step size for the current input parameter.  Close closes the Step Size dialog. Paste Marker List A pull-down list symbol next to a numeric input field opens a list of all current stimulus and response marker values of the active trace.
  • Page 52 ® ® ® R&S ZVA / R&S ZVB / R&S System Overview Screen Elements (Trace – The analyzer allows arbitrary combinations of display formats and measured quantities Measure). Nevertheless, in order to extract useful information from the data, it is important to select a display format which is appropriate to the analysis of a particular measured quantity;...
  • Page 53 ® ® ® R&S ZVA / R&S ZVB / R&S System Overview Screen Elements An extended range of formats and conversion formulas is available for markers. To convert any point on a trace, create a marker and select the appropriate marker format.
  • Page 54 ® ® ® R&S ZVA / R&S ZVB / R&S System Overview Screen Elements Smith Chart The Smith chart is a circular diagram that maps the complex reflection coefficients S to normalized impedance values. In contrast to the polar diagram, the scaling of the diagram is not linear. The grid lines correspond to points of constant resistance and reactance.
  • Page 55 ® ® ® R&S ZVA / R&S ZVB / R&S System Overview Screen Elements Example: Reflection coefficients in the Smith chart If the measured quantity is a complex reflection coefficient Γ (e.g. S ), then the unit Smith chart can be used to read the normalized impedance of the DUT.
  • Page 56 ® ® ® R&S ZVA / R&S ZVB / R&S System Overview Screen Elements help system). A comparison of the inverted Smith chart with the Smith chart and the polar diagram reveals many similarities between the different representations. In fact the shape of a trace does not change at all if the display format is switched from Polar to Inverted Smith or Smith –...
  • Page 57 ® ® ® R&S ZVA / R&S ZVB / R&S System Overview Screen Elements in order to deduce the following properties of the graphical representation in an inverted Smith chart:  Real reflection coefficients are mapped to real admittances (conductances).

  • Page 58: Measured Quantities

    ® ® ® R&S ZVA / R&S ZVB / R&S System Overview Measured Quantities Complex dimensionless Complex quantities with dimensions: Real quantities: quantities: Wave quantities, Z-parameters, Y-parameters, Stability Factors, DC S-parameters and ratios impedances, admittances Input 1/2, PAE Real –...
  • Page 59 ® ® ® R&S ZVA / R&S ZVB / R&S System Overview Measured Quantities linear equation: The four 2-port S-parameters can be interpreted as follows:  is the reflection coefficient of port 1, i.e. the ratio between outgoing wave b...

  • Page 60: Impedance Parameters

    ® ® ® R&S ZVA / R&S ZVB / R&S System Overview Measured Quantities Impedance Parameters An impedance is the complex ratio between a voltage and a current. The analyzer provides two independent sets of impedance parameters:  Converted impedances (each impedance parameter is obtained from a single S-parameter) ...

  • Page 61: Admittance Parameters

    ® ® ® R&S ZVA / R&S ZVB / R&S System Overview Measured Quantities Z-Parameters The Z-parameters describe the impedances of a DUT with open output ports (I = 0). The analyzer provides the full set of Z-parameters including the transfer impedances (i.e. the complete nxn Z-matrix for an n port DUT).
  • Page 62 ® ® ® R&S ZVA / R&S ZVB / R&S System Overview Measured Quantities Converted Admittances The converted admittance parameters describe the input admittances of a DUT with fully matched outputs.The converted admittances are the inverse of the converted impedances.

  • Page 63: Wave Quantities And Ratios

    ® ® ® R&S ZVA / R&S ZVB / R&S System Overview Measured Quantities expressed with two linear equations: Meaning of Y-parameters The four 2-port Y-parameters can be interpreted as follows:  is the input admittance, defined as the ratio of the current I...

  • Page 64: Mixed Mode Parameters

    ® ® ® R&S ZVA / R&S ZVB / R&S System Overview Measured Quantities To increase the accuracy or correct a possible attenuation in the input signal path, it is recommended to perform a power calibration. The notation for wave quantities includes the direction and the test port number. Additionally, the source port must be specified.
  • Page 65 ® ® ® R&S ZVA / R&S ZVB / R&S System Overview Measured Quantities and admittances) for balanced measurements. The analyzer can measure mixed mode parameters as soon as a balanced port configuration is selected. Mixed mode parameters are used to distinguish the following three port modes: ...

  • Page 66: Unbalance-Balance Conversion

    ® ® ® R&S ZVA / R&S ZVB / R&S System Overview Measured Quantities DUT with one balanced and one single-ended port. DUT with two balanced ports or one balanced and two single-ended ports. Both device types are fully characterized by 4x4 mixed mode S-matrices.

  • Page 67: Calibration Overview

    ® ® ® R&S ZVA / R&S ZVB / R&S System Overview Calibration Overview a test fixture), it is possible to shift the calibration plane using length offset parameters.  Differential and common mode parameters can be evaluated with a single test setup.

  • Page 68: Calibration Standards And Calibration Kits

    ® ® R&S ZVA / R&S ZVB / R&S System Overview Calibration Overview calibration types the magnitude and phase response of each calibration standard (i.e. its S- parameters if no system errors occur) must be known within the entire sweep range. In some calibration procedures (TRL, TNA, TRM), part of the characteristics of the standards can be auto- determined due to implicit redundancy (self-calibration).

  • Page 69: Calibration Types

    ® ® ® R&S ZVA / R&S ZVB / R&S System Overview Calibration Overview tables stored in a file. The analyzer provides a large number of predefined cal kits but can also import cal kit files and create new kits: ...
  • Page 70 ® ® ® R&S ZVA / R&S ZVB / R&S System Overview Calibration Overview Calibration Standards Parameters Error Terms General Application Type Accuracy (2 or more Reflect at all ports, Through Reflection High, high Reflection and transmission ports) tracking, directivity...
  • Page 71 ® ® ® R&S ZVA / R&S ZVB / R&S System Overview Calibration Overview  The match standard is used to derive the directivity error. A full one-port calibration is more accurate than a normalization but is only applicable for reflection measurements.
  • Page 72 ® ® ® R&S ZVA / R&S ZVB / R&S System Overview Calibration Overview The analyzer automatically performs each through measurement in both directions, so the number of connected standards is smaller than the number of measurements. See also Full n-port Calibration with Reduced Number of Through Connections below.
  • Page 73 ® ® R&S ZVA / R&S ZVB / R&S System Overview Calibration Overview TRL calibration is especially useful for DUTs in planar line technology (e.g. test fixtures, on-wafer measurements) where it is difficult to design and connect accurately modeled open, short or match standards.

  • Page 74: Automatic Calibration

     The 2- and 4-port calibration units R&S ZV-Z51, R&S ZV-Z52, R&S ZV-Z53, R&S ZV-Z54, and R&S ZVA-Z55 are especially suited for R&S ZVB and R&S ZVA vector network analyzers.  Within their respective frequency ranges, you may also use one of the calibration units R&S ZN- Z51 (2 or 4 ports) or R&S ZN-Z151 (2 ports)
  • Page 75 ® ® ® R&S ZVA / R&S ZVB / R&S System Overview Calibration Overview Calibration Recommended for Frequency range Connector type No. of ports Order no. unit R&S ZV-Z51 R&S ZVB4, R&S 300 kHz to 8 GHz 3.5 mm (f) 1164.0515.30...

  • Page 76: Power Calibration

    ® ® ® R&S ZVA / R&S ZVB / R&S System Overview Calibration Overview Calibration Recommended for Frequency range Connector type No. of ports Order no. unit ZVB8, R&S ZVA8  The multiport calibration units R&S ZV-Z58, R&S ZV-Z59 and R&S ZN-Z152 are especially suited for R&S ZVT vector network analyzers.

  • Page 77: Offset Parameters

    ® ® ® R&S ZVA / R&S ZVB / R&S System Overview Optional R&S ZVA Extensions system error correction described in section Calibration Overview. For best accuracy, a power calibration should be performed in addition to a system error correction.

  • Page 78: Time Domain (R&S Zvab-K2)

    ® ® ® R&S ZVA / R&S ZVB / R&S System Overview Optional R&S ZVA Extensions Option Option Name Functionality R&S ZVAB-K30 Noise Figure Measurement Provides the noise figure of a DUT which operates in its linear range. R&S ZVA-K31 Freq.

  • Page 79: Vector Mixer Measurement (R&S Zva-K5)

    ® ® R&S ZVA / R&S ZVB / R&S System Overview Optional R&S ZVA Extensions RF and LO (IF = RF + LO), and another at the frequency difference between the RF and LO (IF = |RF – LO|). Filtering can be used to select one of these IF outputs and reject the unwanted one.

  • Page 80: Measurements On Pulsed Signals (R&S Zva-K7)

    ® ® ® R&S ZVA / R&S ZVB / R&S System Overview Optional R&S ZVA Extensions Measurements on Pulsed Signals (R&S ZVA-K7) Measurements on pulsed RF signals are required in many areas of RF and microwave technology. Pulsed signals are used in mobile phone applications and radar systems, and amplifiers are typically designed for pulsed rather than continuous wave (CW) conditions.

  • Page 81: Noise Figure Measurement (R&S Zvab-K30)

    ® ® ® R&S ZVA / R&S ZVB / R&S System Overview Optional R&S ZVA Extensions Noise Figure Measurement (R&S ZVAB-K30) Provides the noise figure of a DUT which operates in its linear range. The noise figure of a device is the ratio of the output signal-to-noise ratio (SNR) to the input SNR, provided that a thermal noise signal is fed to the input.

  • Page 82: Measurement Examples

    ® ® ® R&S ZVA / R&S ZVB / R&S Measurement Examples Simple Measurement Tasks 4 Measurement Examples This chapter provides examples for typical measurement tasks to be performed on the network analyzer. To make yourself familiar with the instrument, use the simple measurement examples outlined in the Getting Started chapter.

  • Page 83: Data Transfer

    ® ® R&S ZVA / R&S ZVB / R&S Measurement Examples Simple Measurement Tasks elements. The following examples show how to change the display colors. To select or define a color scheme for the diagrams and their display elements ...

  • Page 84: Setting Up A Sweep

    ® ® ® R&S ZVA / R&S ZVB / R&S Measurement Examples Simple Measurement Tasks To load a setup stored on a USB memory stick... 1. Plug a USB stick into any of the USB type A connectors on the front or rear panel of the analyzer.
  • Page 85 ® ® ® R&S ZVA / R&S ZVB / R&S Measurement Examples Simple Measurement Tasks To Set up a Segmented Frequency Sweep... 1. Press the Sweep key in the Channel keypad or click Channel - Sweep to access the Sweep submenu.

  • Page 86: Optimization

    ® ® ® R&S ZVA / R&S ZVB / R&S Measurement Examples Optimization To Set up a CW Mode Sweep... 1. Press the Sweep key in the Channel keypad or click Channel - Sweep to access the Sweep submenu. 2. Click Sweep Type - CW Mode.

  • Page 87: Calibration

    ® ® ® R&S ZVA / R&S ZVB / R&S Measurement Examples Calibration The analyzer determines the minimum sweep time according to the current channel settings. The sweep is performed at maximum speed without delay. Avoid delay times between the end of the measurement sequence and the next trigger event: If you don't need a special trigger mode, click Channel –...
  • Page 88 ® ® ® R&S ZVA / R&S ZVB / R&S Measurement Examples Calibration 1. Perform all channel settings for your measurement. 2. Click Channel – Calibration – Start Cal – Two Port P1 P2 – Manual... to open the calibration wizard for the desired calibration type.
  • Page 89 ® ® ® R&S ZVA / R&S ZVB / R&S Measurement Examples Calibration Note that the gender combinations (mm, ff or mf) of both Lines must be equal. TRL calibration with 2 Lines Suppose you want to perform a calibration using coaxial air Lines for the sweep range between 1 GHz and 40 GHz.
  • Page 90 ® ® ® R&S ZVA / R&S ZVB / R&S Measurement Examples Calibration TRL calibration with 3 Lines Suppose you want to perform a calibration using coaxial air Lines for the sweep range between 200 MHz and 40 GHz. The through standard has length l .
  • Page 91 ® ® ® R&S ZVA / R&S ZVB / R&S Measurement Examples Calibration Click Apply to start the calculation of the system error correction data, apply them to the current channel and close the calibration wizard. Replace the last measured standard with your DUT and perform calibrated measurements without changing the channel settings used for calibration.

  • Page 92: Waveguide Calibration Using Kit R&S Zv-Wr10

    ® ® R&S ZVA / R&S ZVB / R&S Measurement Examples Calibration 4. Since the NIST Multiline TRL method produces an accurate result for the propagation constant it is possible to arbitrarily shift the reference plane. You can leave it at its default position (connector plane) or move it towards the DUT (positive values) or towards the connector (negative values) to meet your measurement requirements.
  • Page 93 ® ® ® R&S ZVA / R&S ZVB / R&S Measurement Examples Calibration Click “Next” to proceed to the “Measure Standards” dialog. Connect the Short standard from the calibration kit to the frequency converter no. 1 (the converter with RF IN connected to the analyzer port no. 1) and click “Port 1: WR10” > “Short” to initiate the calibration sweep.

  • Page 94: Waveguide Calibration Using Kit R&S Zv-Wr03

    ® ® ® R&S ZVA / R&S ZVB / R&S Measurement Examples Calibration You can use the sliding match instead of the fixed match in order to improve the accuracy of the system error correction. Both standards cover the same frequency range.
  • Page 95 ® ® R&S ZVA / R&S ZVB / R&S Measurement Examples Calibration 2. Click “Channel” > “Start Cal” > “Two Port P1 P2” > “TRL”. The calibration kit R&S ZV-WR03 is preinstalled. It is displayed in the “Select Physical VNA Test Port Connector(s)”...

  • Page 96: Trace Evaluation

    ® ® ® R&S ZVA / R&S ZVB / R&S Measurement Examples Trace Evaluation the fixed match in order to improve the accuracy of the system error correction. Both standards cover the same frequency range. You can check the calibration by measuring a standard that was not used during the system error correction (e.g.
  • Page 97 ® ® R&S ZVA / R&S ZVB / R&S Measurement Examples Trace Evaluation 2. Click Trace – Trace Select – Add Trace to add a new trace to the diagram area. The new trace is automatically assigned a trace name (e.g. Trc3) and selected as the active trace.

  • Page 98: Trace Statistics

    ® ® ® R&S ZVA / R&S ZVB / R&S Measurement Examples Trace Evaluation Trace Statistics After measuring a quantity across the selected sweep range, the analyzer can analyze the trace and determine various statistical results. To determine the x-dB compression point...

  • Page 99: Port Conversion

    ® ® ® R&S ZVA / R&S ZVB / R&S Measurement Examples Port Conversion S-parameter or ratio). 3. Click Trace - Trace Func - Time Domain - Time Domain to transform the active trace to the time domain. The transformed trace is displayed in the active diagram area. To refine the analysis, you can modify the...

  • Page 100: Using Virtual Networks (Embedding/Deembedding)

    ® ® R&S ZVA / R&S ZVB / R&S Measurement Examples Port Conversion Connect your DUT to ports 1 to 4 of the network analyzer as shown in the figure above. Click OK to close the Balanced Ports and Port Groups dialog.
  • Page 101 ® ® ® R&S ZVA / R&S ZVB / R&S Measurement Examples Port Conversion 2. Establish the necessary Channel settings (port configuration, sweep range and type etc.) and select the measured quantities (Trace – Measure). 3. Click Channel – Mode – Virtual Transform – Single Port Embedding to open the Single Port Embedding...
  • Page 102 ® ® R&S ZVA / R&S ZVB / R&S Measurement Examples Port Conversion 1. Connect ports 1 and 3 of a 3- or 4-port analyzer to the balanced ports of the DUT, connect port 2 to the single ended port of the DUT.

  • Page 103: Using True Differential Mode

    ® ® ® R&S ZVA / R&S ZVB / R&S Measurement Examples Port Conversion appropriate Serial 2-Port.. transformation network, import the 2-port files, and adjust the remaining R, C, and L parameters. Click Deembed DUT and Close the dialog. The traces of the active channel show the characteristics of the DUT without the effects of the removed physical transformation network.
  • Page 104 ® ® R&S ZVA / R&S ZVB / R&S Measurement Examples Port Conversion Connect one balanced port of your DUT to ports 1 and 3 of the network analyzer, the other balanced port of your DUT to ports 2 and 4 of the network analyzer, in accordance with the selected port combination and reference impedances.
  • Page 105 ® ® ® R&S ZVA / R&S ZVB / R&S Measurement Examples Port Conversion You can also access all the described settings from the Measurement Wizard. Performing an amplitude or phase imbalance sweep... Amplitude or phase imbalance sweeps are special sweep types in true differential mode. The analyzer generates a balanced signal at one of its logical ports, however, the amplitude of one signal component or the relative phase of the two components is varied according to a selected sweep range.

  • Page 106: Harmonics Measurements

    ® ® R&S ZVA / R&S ZVB / R&S Measurement Examples Harmonics Measurements The following example shows how to perform scalar mixer measurements on a differential mixer with balanced RF input and IF output ports and a single-ended LO input. With a four-port analyzer, a possible test setup involves the following connections: ...

  • Page 107: To Obtain A Harmonic Distortion Factor

    ® ® ® R&S ZVA / R&S ZVB / R&S Measurement Examples Harmonics Measurements To obtain a harmonic distortion factor... 1. Reset the analyzer to ensure that the following operating mode is set: Sweep Type: Lin. Frequency, Trace - Meas.: S21, Trace - Format: dB Mag.
  • Page 108 ® ® ® R&S ZVA / R&S ZVB / R&S Measurement Examples Harmonics Measurements To activate the measurement... 1. Reset the analyzer to ensure that the basic operating mode is set: Sweep Type: Lin. Frequency, Trace - Measure: S21, Trace - Format: dB Mag.
  • Page 109 ® ® R&S ZVA / R&S ZVB / R&S Measurement Examples Harmonics Measurements measurement. You can choose between a one path two port and a full two port calibration for the analyzer ports 1 and 2. It is recommended to select the AVG detector in the calibration wizard.

  • Page 110: Gui Reference

    ® ® ® R&S ZVA / R&S ZVB / R&S GUI Reference Control Menus 5 GUI Reference This chapter explains all functions of the analyzer and their application. It is organized according to the menus/softkey groups of the user interface.

  • Page 111: Move

    ® ® ® R&S ZVA / R&S ZVB / R&S GUI Reference File Menu Move Displays a four-headed arrow to move the active window with the arrow keys or with the mouse. This command is unavailable for maximized windows. Size Displays a four-headed arrow to change the size of the active window using the arrow keys or the mouse.

  • Page 112: New

    ® ® ® R&S ZVA / R&S ZVB / R&S GUI Reference File Menu Setups A setup comprises a set of diagram areas with all displayed information that can be stored to a NWA setup file (*.zvx). Each setup is displayed in an independent window.

  • Page 113: Close

    ® ® ® R&S ZVA / R&S ZVB / R&S GUI Reference File Menu File – Open / File – Save To open an existing setup, select Recall. To rename a setup, use MEMory:DEFine "<setup_name>" Remote control: Close Closes an opened setup window. The analyzer suggests to save changes to the setup before closing it. If a setup is closed without saving, all changes made since the last time it was saved are lost.

  • Page 114: Print Preview

    ® ® ® R&S ZVA / R&S ZVB / R&S GUI Reference File Menu  Preferences opens a dialog to select the layout and paper format and specify further printer options.  Find Printer opens a dialog to select and install a printer that is not yet installed on the instrument.
  • Page 115 ® ® ® R&S ZVA / R&S ZVB / R&S GUI Reference File Menu Page Setup Dialog Provides options to specify how the document should be printed. Page Setup is opened by means of the File – Page Setup... command.

  • Page 116: Print To Clipboard

    ® ® ® R&S ZVA / R&S ZVB / R&S GUI Reference File Menu  Preview shows the active setup as it would appear when printed. To select the Print Range and start printing, open the Print dialog. Use standard Windows techniques to install printers and configure ports.
  • Page 117 ® ® ® R&S ZVA / R&S ZVB / R&S GUI Reference File Menu  Save in specifies the drive and directory in which the screen contents are stored. The icons to the right of the pull-down list are provided for easy navigation in the file system (place the cursor on the icons to obtain What's this? help).

  • Page 118: Save

    ® ® ® R&S ZVA / R&S ZVB / R&S GUI Reference File Menu Save Saves and names the active setup. The analyzer opens a standard Windows™ Save As dialog box to select a NWA setup file name (*.zvx) and location for the setup file.

  • Page 119: Recent File

    ® ® R&S ZVA / R&S ZVB / R&S GUI Reference File Menu attempt is made to open the same setup again the analyzer displays a warning: Yes overwrites the changes in the opened setup, No closes the message box, leaving the opened setup unchanged.

  • Page 120: Trace Menu

    ® ® ® R&S ZVA / R&S ZVB / R&S GUI Reference Trace Menu Trace Menu The Trace menu provides all trace settings and the functions to select, modify and store different traces. In addition the menu provides the marker, search and limit check functions.

  • Page 121: Measure

    ® ® ® R&S ZVA / R&S ZVB / R&S GUI Reference Trace Menu Measure The Measure submenu selects the quantity to be measured and displayed.  S11, S12, S21, S22 select the four elements of the standard 2-port scattering matrix (S- parameters).
  • Page 122 ® ® ® R&S ZVA / R&S ZVB / R&S GUI Reference Trace Menu Efficiency (PAE).  Power Sensor opens a configuration dialog for the measurement of wave quantities using an external power meter.  Noise Figure selects the results of the Noise Figure measurement (with option R&S ZVAB-K30).
  • Page 123 ® ® ® R&S ZVA / R&S ZVB / R&S GUI Reference Trace Menu "S21" | "S22" CALCulate<Ch>:PARameter:DEFine:SGRoup to create traces for all S- parameters associated with a group of logical ports. S-Parameters in Frequency Conversion Measurements The concept of S-parameters can be extended to a- and b-waves with different frequencies ("arbitrary" S- parameters).
  • Page 124 ® ® ® R&S ZVA / R&S ZVB / R&S GUI Reference Trace Menu  S-Parameter selects the type (left pull-down list) and the port number assignment (right pull-down list) of the S-parameter. Mixed mode parameters are only available if a balanced port configuration is active.
  • Page 125 ® ® ® R&S ZVA / R&S ZVB / R&S GUI Reference Trace Menu  c: Common mode (for balanced ports) All possible combinations of mixed mode parameters (e.g. Sss, Scs, Sds, Sdd,..., Zss, Zcs,...) are provided. Sss is used for unbalanced S-parameters if the balanced-unbalanced conversion is active;...
  • Page 126 ® ® R&S ZVA / R&S ZVB / R&S GUI Reference Trace Menu The predefined wave quantities are all obtained with the same test set configuration, port 1 providing the stimulus signal (source port 1, forward measurement if the stimulus signal is fed to the input of the DUT).
  • Page 127 ® ® ® R&S ZVA / R&S ZVB / R&S GUI Reference Trace Menu  Ratio indicates the selected ratio.  Source Port contains all analyzer ports or external generators which can be used as a source for the stimulus signal. The list contains all analyzer ports Port 1 to Port n. Generators (Gen 1, Gen 2, ...) must be configured explicitly in the System Configuration –...
  • Page 128 ® ® ® R&S ZVA / R&S ZVB / R&S GUI Reference Trace Menu The following detectors are available:  Normal selects the default detector mode where each measurement point is displayed without modification as soon as it is recognized to be valid. The analyzer then proceeds to the next sweep point.
  • Page 129 ® ® ® R&S ZVA / R&S ZVB / R&S GUI Reference Trace Menu Measurements at Two Different Frequencies (for R&S ZVA and R&S ZVT Analyzers) More Ratios More Wave Quantities dialogs provide the wave quantities a1, b1... These wave...
  • Page 130 ® ® ® R&S ZVA / R&S ZVB / R&S GUI Reference Trace Menu Wave Quantities The Wave Quantities submenu selects a wave quantity to be measured and displayed.  a1 Src Port 1, b1 Src Port 1, b2 Src Port 1, a2 Src Port 2, b1 Src Port 2 and b2 Src Port 2 select...
  • Page 131 ® ® ® R&S ZVA / R&S ZVB / R&S GUI Reference Trace Menu wave is fed to the output port (port 2) of the DUT (reverse measurement).  b1 Src Port 2 is the wave received at test port 1. In a standard S-parameter measurement, this wave is transmitted at port 2 of the DUT (reverse measurement).
  • Page 132 ® ® R&S ZVA / R&S ZVB / R&S GUI Reference Trace Menu they appear in the list. The analyzer places no restriction on the combination of source ports and port numbers of the measured wave quantity, so it is even possible to measure a while the source port is port 1 (e.g.
  • Page 133 ® ® ® R&S ZVA / R&S ZVB / R&S GUI Reference Trace Menu Intermod Distortion Quantities (for R&S ZVA and R&S ZVT) The Intermod Distortion Quantities submenu provides the results of the intermodulation distortion measurement, enabled with option R&S ZVA-K4. The results are available as soon as the measurement (Channel –...
  • Page 134 ® ® ® R&S ZVA / R&S ZVB / R&S GUI Reference Trace Menu  The Lower IM3 Product at DUT Out is the third-order lower intermodulation product at the output of the DUT. This quantity corresponds to the outgoing wave quantity (b wave) at the output of the DUT, measured at the frequency of the lower tone minus the tone distance.
  • Page 135 ® ® ® R&S ZVA / R&S ZVB / R&S GUI Reference Trace Menu CALCulate<Ch>:PARameter:MEASure "<Trace_Name>", "IP3LI" | "IM3LI" Remote | "LTI" | ... control: Create new trace and select name and measurement parameter: CALCulate<Ch>:PARameter:SDEFine "<Trace_Name>", "IP3LI" | "IM3LI" | "LTI" | ...
  • Page 136 ® ® R&S ZVA / R&S ZVB / R&S GUI Reference Trace Menu The controls in the dialog define the order of the intercept point, measured at the DUT input or output, and the position of the intercept point relative to the lower and upper tones.
  • Page 137 ® ® ® R&S ZVA / R&S ZVB / R&S GUI Reference Trace Menu  Mixer Delay is the group delay of the mixer. This measured quantity is selected automatically when a mixer delay measurement is activated.  The Delay Derivative is the derivative of the Mixer Delay with respect to the sweep variable. It shows how much the mixer delay changes at each sweep point as the sweep variable (typically, the frequency) changes.
  • Page 138 ® ® ® R&S ZVA / R&S ZVB / R&S GUI Reference Trace Menu measurements. Z <– S11, Z <– S12, Z <– S21, Z <– S22 Select the 2-port converted impedance parameters. The parameters describe the impedances of a 2-port DUT, obtained in forward and reverse transmission and reflection measurements: ...
  • Page 139 ® ® ® R&S ZVA / R&S ZVB / R&S GUI Reference Trace Menu and <in> denote the output (response) and input (stimulus) port numbers of the DUT.  Balanced and Measured Ports opens the Balanced Port and Port Groups dialog to define the properties of the test ports.
  • Page 140 ® ® ® R&S ZVA / R&S ZVB / R&S GUI Reference Trace Menu  Y <– S11, Y <– S12, Y <– S21, Y <– S22 select the converted admittances of a 2-port DUT.  More Admittances... opens a dialog to select converted admittances for more ports or mixed mode measurements.
  • Page 141 ® ® ® R&S ZVA / R&S ZVB / R&S GUI Reference Trace Menu The notation for admittance parameters and the functionality of the More Admittances dialog is analogous to the definition of S-parameters.  Y<— selects the type (left pull-down list) and the port number assignment (right pull-down list) of the admittance parameter.
  • Page 142 ® ® ® R&S ZVA / R&S ZVB / R&S GUI Reference Trace Menu Z-parameters can be used as an alternative to S-parameters (or Y-parameters) in order to completely characterize a linear n-port network. Z-Parameter Is a dialog to select Z-parameters for multiport measurements (including the 2-port Z-parameters) or mixed mode Z-parameters.
  • Page 143 ® ® ® R&S ZVA / R&S ZVB / R&S GUI Reference Trace Menu Y-Parameters Opens the Y-Parameter dialog to select arbitrary Y-parameters for different ports or mixed mode measurements. In analogy to the converted admittances, the Y-parameters are available for any combination of input and output ports.
  • Page 144 ® ® ® R&S ZVA / R&S ZVB / R&S GUI Reference Trace Menu Create new trace and select name and measurement parameter: CALCulate<Ch>:PARameter:SDEFine "<Trace_Name>", "Y11" | "Y12" | "Y21" | "Y22" Stability Factor... Opens a dialog to select one of the three two port stability factors K, μ...
  • Page 145 ® ® ® R&S ZVA / R&S ZVB / R&S GUI Reference Trace Menu if no combination of passive source or load can cause the circuit to oscillate.  The K-factor provides a necessary condition for unconditional stability: A circuit is unconditionally stable if K>1 and an additional condition is met.
  • Page 146 ® ® ® R&S ZVA / R&S ZVB / R&S GUI Reference Trace Menu  The imbalance of a DUT with a balanced logical input port i and a balanced logical output port j is defined as Imb ji = –(S –...
  • Page 147 ® ® ® R&S ZVA / R&S ZVB / R&S GUI Reference Trace Menu A n-port analyzer provides n independent S-parameters S . If a balanced port configuration is <out><in> defined, the normal S-parameters are replaced by mixed mode parameters.
  • Page 148 ® ® ® R&S ZVA / R&S ZVB / R&S GUI Reference Trace Menu  PAE... opens a dialog to select and configure the PAE measurement. All DC and PAE measurements use the input connectors DC MEAS at the rear of the instrument. The measurement results are real-valued and displayed as a function of sweep variable (frequency, internal source power, time).
  • Page 149 ® ® ® R&S ZVA / R&S ZVB / R&S GUI Reference Trace Menu The PAE dialog provides the following settings:  Used Test Ports selects the analyzer port providing the input signal a (DUT Input) and the receiver port for the output signal b (DUT Output).
  • Page 150 ® ® ® R&S ZVA / R&S ZVB / R&S GUI Reference Trace Menu device (e.g. an amplifier) to the supplied DC power P . The added RF power can be expressed as the difference between the power of the outgoing wave b...
  • Page 151 ® ® R&S ZVA / R&S ZVB / R&S GUI Reference Trace Menu k show the SI units of a current (W/V) and an inverse resistance (W/V2), respectively. Models 1 and 4 provide the exact DC power supplied to the DUT, the two other models are based on the approximation P = 0.
  • Page 152 ® ® ® R&S ZVA / R&S ZVB / R&S GUI Reference Trace Menu Configuration – External Power Meters dialog for adding and configuring external power meters, start Auto Zeroing for the selected power meter, and open the Power Meter Correction dialog..
  • Page 153 ® ® R&S ZVA / R&S ZVB / R&S GUI Reference Trace Menu power meter differs from the frequency of the source port. It is recommended to define the modified frequency range for the power meter in the Port Configuration dialog and select From Power Meter Entry in Port Configuration.

  • Page 154: Format

    ® ® ® R&S ZVA / R&S ZVB / R&S GUI Reference Trace Menu Format The Format submenu defines how the measured data is presented in the graphical display.  dB Mag selects a Cartesian diagram with a logarithmic scale of the vertical axis to display the magnitude of a complex measured quantity.
  • Page 155 ® ® ® R&S ZVA / R&S ZVB / R&S GUI Reference Trace Menu dB Mag Selects a Cartesian diagram with a logarithmic scale of the vertical axis to display the magnitude of the complex measured quantity. Properties: The stimulus variable appears on the horizontal axis, scaled linearly. The magnitude of the complex quantity C, i.e.
  • Page 156 ® ® R&S ZVA / R&S ZVB / R&S GUI Reference Trace Menu The axis for the sweep variable is lost in Smith charts but the marker functions easily provide the stimulus value of any measurement point. dB values for the magnitude and other conversions can be...
  • Page 157 ® ® ® R&S ZVA / R&S ZVB / R&S GUI Reference Trace Menu Δf must be adjusted to the conditions of the measurement. aperture If the delay is constant over the considered frequency range (non-dispersive DUT, e.g. a cable), then τ...
  • Page 158 ® ® ® R&S ZVA / R&S ZVB / R&S GUI Reference Trace Menu Calculation of Δf and ΔΦ With a given number of aperture steps n the delay at sweep point no. m is calculated as follows:  If n is even (n = 2k), then Δf (m) = f (m+k) – f (m–k) and ΔΦ(m) = ΔΦ (m+k) – ΔΦ (m–k).
  • Page 159 ® ® R&S ZVA / R&S ZVB / R&S GUI Reference Trace Menu comparable to the delay itself. Then the delay curve is noisy as shown below. The aperture in the example is set to 400 MHz / 200 = 2 MHz, the group delay uncertainty is approx. 0.5 ns. The estimated uncertainty of the phase difference measurement is δ(ΔΦ) <...
  • Page 160 ® ® ® R&S ZVA / R&S ZVB / R&S GUI Reference Trace Menu The following table lists "optimum" apertures Δf = 0.3 / τ together with sample analyzer settings for a g,meas frequency sweep with 201 sweep points. Notice that the sweep span must be reduced or the number of frequency points increased to obtain small apertures.
  • Page 161 ® ® ® R&S ZVA / R&S ZVB / R&S GUI Reference Trace Menu schwarz.com/en/products/test_and_measurement/network_analysis/?_view=downloads&downloadtype=2 0&type=20&downid=1550 CALCulate<Chn>:GDAPerture:SCOunt Remote control: Calculates the Standing Wave Ratio (SWR) from the measured quantity (primarily: from a reflection S- parameter) and displays it in a Cartesian diagram.
  • Page 162 ® ® ® R&S ZVA / R&S ZVB / R&S GUI Reference Trace Menu Real Selects a Cartesian diagram to display the real part of a complex measured quantity. Properties: The stimulus variable appears on the horizontal axis, scaled linearly. The real part Re(C) of the complex quantity C = Re(C) + j Im(C), appears on the vertical axis, also scaled linearly.

  • Page 163: Scale

    ® ® ® R&S ZVA / R&S ZVB / R&S GUI Reference Trace Menu Unwrapped Phase Selects a Cartesian diagram with an arbitrarily scaled linear vertical axis to display the phase of the measured quantity. Properties: The stimulus variable appears on the horizontal axis, scaled linearly. The phase of the complex quantity C, i.e.
  • Page 164 ® ® ® R&S ZVA / R&S ZVB / R&S GUI Reference Trace Menu (Trace – The Scale settings depend on the diagram type Format) because not all diagrams can be scaled in the same way:  In Cartesian diagrams, all scale settings are available.
  • Page 165 ® ® ® R&S ZVA / R&S ZVB / R&S GUI Reference Trace Menu (units) for all other (dimensionless) formats. Scale /Div is not available (grayed) for circular diagrams (Polar, Smith, Inverted Smith). DISPlay[:WINDow<Wnd>]:TRACe<WndTr>:Y:PDIVision Remote control: Ref. Value Sets the reference line of a Cartesian diagram or the outer circumference of a circular diagram.

  • Page 166: Trace Select

    ® ® ® R&S ZVA / R&S ZVB / R&S GUI Reference Trace Menu Max and Min are not available (grayed) for polar diagrams (Polar, Smith, Inverted Smith). DISPlay[:WINDow<Wnd>]:TRACe<WndTr>:Y:TOP Remote control: DISPlay[:WINDow<Wnd>]:TRACe<WndTr>:Y:BOTTom Ref. Val = Marker Sets the reference value...
  • Page 167 ® ® ® R&S ZVA / R&S ZVB / R&S GUI Reference Trace Menu  Next Trace selects the next trace as the active trace (disabled if only one trace is defined).  Select Trace opens a box to select an arbitrary trace of the active setup as the active trace (disabled if only one trace is defined).
  • Page 168 ® ® ® R&S ZVA / R&S ZVB / R&S GUI Reference Trace Menu Next Trace has the following meaning:  In a list of traces displayed in a common diagram area, the next trace is the trace below the current trace (in the figure above, Trc 3 is the active trace and Trc 4 is the next trace).
  • Page 169 ® ® ® R&S ZVA / R&S ZVB / R&S GUI Reference Trace Menu The new trace is named Trc <n>, where <n> is the largest of all existing trace numbers plus one. The name can be changed in the Trace Manager.
  • Page 170 ® ® ® R&S ZVA / R&S ZVB / R&S GUI Reference Trace Menu  Selecting one of the existing area numbers assigns the active trace to the existing diagram area: The active trace is removed from the previous area and displayed in the new diagram area.
  • Page 171 ® ® ® R&S ZVA / R&S ZVB / R&S GUI Reference Trace Menu  Scale shows which traces use common scaling and format settings. Rules for trace names The analyzer can define mathematical relations between different traces and calculate new mathematical...

  • Page 172: Trace Funct

    ® ® ® R&S ZVA / R&S ZVB / R&S GUI Reference Trace Menu The channel and scale coupling is set in two independent panels.  Decouple All assigns independent channel or scale settings to all traces in the Trace Manager.
  • Page 173 ® ® ® R&S ZVA / R&S ZVB / R&S GUI Reference Trace Menu  Data -> Mem stores the active data trace as a memory trace.  Math = Data/Mem activates the mathematical mode where the data trace is divided by the memory trace.
  • Page 174 ® ® ® R&S ZVA / R&S ZVB / R&S GUI Reference Trace Menu  Max Hold On enables or disables the max hold (peak hold) function for the active trace.  Min Hold On enables or disables the min hold function for the active trace.
  • Page 175 ® ® R&S ZVA / R&S ZVB / R&S GUI Reference Trace Menu If the sweep type of a data trace is changed so that the stimulus ranges of the data traces and the memory traces become incompatible, all coupled memory traces are removed from the diagram area and deleted.
  • Page 176 ® ® ® R&S ZVA / R&S ZVB / R&S GUI Reference Trace Menu  Data —> Mem opens a dialog to store the active trace to a memory trace.  All Data —> Mem opens a dialog to store all traces in the active setup to memory traces.
  • Page 177 ® ® ® R&S ZVA / R&S ZVB / R&S GUI Reference Trace Menu  Store Trace <trace_name> to contains all memory traces associated with the active data trace. The selected memory trace can be replaced.  Data -> Mem stores the active data trace to the memory trace selected above. If no memory trace is associated with the current trace, then a new memory trace is created.
  • Page 178 ® ® ® R&S ZVA / R&S ZVB / R&S GUI Reference Trace Menu  Data & Trace Funct. -> New Mem stores the current state of all data traces modified by the trace functions to new memory traces, leaving the existing memory traces unchanged.
  • Page 179 ® ® ® R&S ZVA / R&S ZVB / R&S GUI Reference Trace Menu The analyzer processes only numeric values without units in the mathematical formulas. No consistency check for units is performed. In its upper part the dialog contains a window to view and edit the mathematical expression and four buttons: ...
  • Page 180 ® ® ® R&S ZVA / R&S ZVB / R&S GUI Reference Trace Menu Grouping parts of an expression linMag |z| = sqrt ( x dBMag dB Mag(z) = 20 * log|z| dB Phase φ (z) = arctan ( Im(z) / Re(z) )
  • Page 181 ® ® R&S ZVA / R&S ZVB / R&S GUI Reference Trace Menu expression represents a voltage. Examples for voltage-type expressions are all terms proportional to a wave quantity (e.g. 1.1*Data, if a wave quantity is measured) or to a stimulus value of a power sweep.
  • Page 182 ® ® ® R&S ZVA / R&S ZVB / R&S GUI Reference Trace Menu  Define Transform... opens a dialog to define the transformation type and the frequency domain window used to optimize the time domain response.  Frequency Domain...
  • Page 183 ® ® ® R&S ZVA / R&S ZVB / R&S GUI Reference Trace Menu  The radio buttons in the Type panel select a bandpass or lowpass transform. To calculate a lowpass transform the sweep points must be on a harmonic grid (otherwise the analyzer will only be able to calculate an approximate result and generate a warning).
  • Page 184 ® ® ® R&S ZVA / R&S ZVB / R&S GUI Reference Trace Menu An independent Time Gate can be used after the transformation in order to eliminate unwanted responses. CALCulate<Chn>:TRANsform:TIME[:TYPE] Remote control: CALCulate<Chn>:TRANsform:TIME:STIMulus CALCulate<Chn>:TRANsform:TIME:WINDow CALCulate<Chn>:TRANsform:TIME:DCHebyshev CALCulate<Chn>:TRANsform:TIME:RESolution:EFACtor Band Pass and Low Pass Mode The analyzer provides two essentially different types of time domain transforms: ...
  • Page 185 ® ® ® R&S ZVA / R&S ZVB / R&S GUI Reference Trace Menu Integrate impulse response Obtain step response The step response is recommended for impedance measurements and for the analysis of discontinuities (especially inductive and capacitive discontinuities). The impulse response has an unambiguous magnitude and is therefore recommended for most other applications.
  • Page 186 ® ® R&S ZVA / R&S ZVB / R&S GUI Reference Trace Menu If a harmonic grid, including the DC value (f = 0) is mirrored to the negative frequency range, the result is again an equidistant grid. The point symmetry with respect to the DC value makes harmonic grids suitable lowpass time domain transformations.
  • Page 187 ® ® ® R&S ZVA / R&S ZVB / R&S GUI Reference Trace Menu Set Harmonic Grid In the Set Harmonic Grid... panel of the Low Pass Settings dialog, a harmonic grid can be calculated in three alternative ways: ...
  • Page 188 ® ® ® R&S ZVA / R&S ZVB / R&S GUI Reference Trace Menu maximum frequency of the analyzer, then an error message is displayed, and another harmonic grid algorithm must be used.  Keep Stop Frequency and Approximate Frequency Gap means that the stop frequency is...
  • Page 189 ® ® ® R&S ZVA / R&S ZVB / R&S GUI Reference Trace Menu Frequency Domain Selects the frequency domain representation for the active trace. The softkey is enabled if a linear frequency sweep (Channel – Sweep – Sweep Type – Lin. Frequency) is active.
  • Page 190 ® ® R&S ZVA / R&S ZVB / R&S GUI Reference Trace Menu frequency sweep (Channel – Sweep – Sweep Type – Lin. Frequency) is active. The analyzer automatically quits time domain representation as soon as a different sweep type is selected.
  • Page 191 ® ® ® R&S ZVA / R&S ZVB / R&S GUI Reference Trace Menu  Start Time Domain is the lowest displayed time and corresponds to the left edge of the Cartesian diagram.  Stop Time Domain is the highest displayed time and corresponds to the right edge of the Cartesian diagram.
  • Page 192 ® ® ® R&S ZVA / R&S ZVB / R&S GUI Reference Trace Menu of the receiving port defined in the Channel – Offset menu the vacuum times the velocity factor (Distance = 1/2 * Time * c * Velocity Factor). The factor 1/2 accounts for the return trip from the DUT to the receiver.
  • Page 193 ® ® ® R&S ZVA / R&S ZVB / R&S GUI Reference Trace Menu  Start and Stop or Center and Span define the size of the time gate. Please make sure that the selected time span does not exceed the unambiguous range which is given by Δt = 1/Δf, where Δf is the spacing between two consecutive frequency points.
  • Page 194 ® ® ® R&S ZVA / R&S ZVB / R&S GUI Reference Trace Menu Window Sidelobe suppression Passband Best for... ripple Arbitrary Gate Shape User defined between 10 0.071 dB Adjustment to individual needs; tradeoff between sidelobe (Dolph-Chebychev) dB and 120 dB suppression and edge steepness CALCulate<Chn>:FILTer[:GATE]:TIME:STARt...
  • Page 195 ® ® ® R&S ZVA / R&S ZVB / R&S GUI Reference Trace Menu Trace Statistics Opens a submenu to evaluate and display statistical and phase information of the entire trace or of a specific evaluation range and calculate the x-dB compression point.
  • Page 196 ® ® ® R&S ZVA / R&S ZVB / R&S GUI Reference Trace Menu Definition of statistical quantities The statistical quantities are calculated from all response values in the selected evaluation range. Suppose that the trace in the evaluation range contains n stimulus values x...
  • Page 197 ® ® ® R&S ZVA / R&S ZVB / R&S GUI Reference Trace Menu Definition of phase parameters The phase parameters are obtained from an approximation to the derivative of the phase with respect to frequency in the selected evaluation range.
  • Page 198 ® ® R&S ZVA / R&S ZVB / R&S GUI Reference Trace Menu The x-dB compression point of an S-parameter or ratio is the stimulus signal level where the magnitude of the measured quantity has dropped by x dB compared to its value at small stimulus signal levels (small- signal value).
  • Page 199 ® ® ® R&S ZVA / R&S ZVB / R&S GUI Reference Trace Menu Suppose that A and B denote the trace points at the beginning and at the end of the evaluation range, respectively.  Gain is the larger of the two stimulus values of points A and B.
  • Page 200 ® ® ® R&S ZVA / R&S ZVB / R&S GUI Reference Trace Menu Smoothing On Activates the smoothing function for the active trace, which may be a data or a memory trace. With active smoothing function, each measurement point is replaced by the arithmetic mean value of all measurement points located in a symmetric interval centered on the stimulus value.
  • Page 201 ® ® ® R&S ZVA / R&S ZVB / R&S GUI Reference Trace Menu  Import Complex Data... calls up an Open File dialog to load a memory trace from a trace file.  Export Complex Data... calls up a Save As... dialog to store data or memory traces to a trace file.
  • Page 202 ® ® ® R&S ZVA / R&S ZVB / R&S GUI Reference Trace Menu The loaded trace data is used to generate a memory trace which is coupled to the active data trace. Import Data corresponds to a standard Open File dialog with two additional check boxes: ...
  • Page 203 ® ® ® R&S ZVA / R&S ZVB / R&S GUI Reference Trace Menu When a *.s1p file is opened the Select Parameter box indicates the 1-port (reflection) parameter S irrespective of the actual S-parameter stored in the file. To import a trace file (*.snp or *.csv) you can also use the Windows Explorer and simply double- click the file or drag and drop the file into the NWA application.
  • Page 204 ® ® ® R&S ZVA / R&S ZVB / R&S GUI Reference Trace Menu Touchstone files use the point as Dec. Separator and contain the reference impedance of the associated ports in the file header; see Trace File Formats. The following export options are available for Touchstone file export: ...
  • Page 205 ® ® ® R&S ZVA / R&S ZVB / R&S GUI Reference Trace Menu The network analyzer tries to ensure consistency of the exported data sets. The following conditions must be met for a Touchstone file export:  For a one-port Touchstone file *.s1p, the reflection coefficient for the specified port (e.g. S port no.
  • Page 206 ® ® ® R&S ZVA / R&S ZVB / R&S GUI Reference Trace Menu and the displayed measurement points to a file. Both complex and formatted data can be converted into different output formats. Export Complex Data corresponds to a standard Save As...
  • Page 207 ® ® ® R&S ZVA / R&S ZVB / R&S GUI Reference Trace Menu an ASCII (*.csv) file.  Ask before Overwriting activates a message box to be displayed before an older trace file with the same file name and directory is overwritten.
  • Page 208 ® ® ® R&S ZVA / R&S ZVB / R&S GUI Reference Trace Menu Export Formatted Data corresponds to a standard Save As... dialog with an additional panel to specify various export options. The Dec. Separator export option is not available for Matlab (*.dat) file export.
  • Page 209 ® ® ® R&S ZVA / R&S ZVB / R&S GUI Reference Trace Menu  Import the created file into a spreadsheet application such as Microsoft Excel.  Export an arbitrary number of traces, multiple traces with the same parameter or memory traces.
  • Page 210 ® ® R&S ZVA / R&S ZVB / R&S GUI Reference Trace Menu The trace data section corresponds to a set of single-ended S-parameters. It depends on the number of ports <n> and the data format. For real and imaginary values (data format = Real-Imag) the trace data for each stimulus frequency is arranged as follows: ...
  • Page 211 ® ® R&S ZVA / R&S ZVB / R&S GUI Reference Trace Menu In general, an ASCII trace file consists of an optional comment block, a mandatory header line and a data block. In addition it may contain any number of blank lines. Together header line and data block form a data table, whose columns are separated by a particular character.
  • Page 212 ® ® ® R&S ZVA / R&S ZVB / R&S GUI Reference Trace Menu (complex) response values. This can be either re and im for carthesian coordinates (Real/Imag output format during Export Complex Data), mag and ang for polar coordinates (Lin Mag-Phase output format) or dB and ang for log-polar coordinates (dB Mag-Phase output format) ...
  • Page 213 ® ® ® R&S ZVA / R&S ZVB / R&S GUI Reference Trace Menu The units of the constants are adjusted to the format of the active trace. Setting all values to zero (Clear All Values) restores the original trace.

  • Page 214: Marker

    ® ® R&S ZVA / R&S ZVB / R&S GUI Reference Trace Menu measured trace instead of the real max hold or min hold trace. A memory trace is complex by definition. Therefore, Data --> Mem stores the last measured trace instead of the real max hold or min hold trace.
  • Page 215 ® ® ® R&S ZVA / R&S ZVB / R&S GUI Reference Trace Menu  Change the sweep range and the diagram scale (Marker Funct.).  Search for specific points on the trace (Search). The Marker menu contains the following functions: ...
  • Page 216 ® ® ® R&S ZVA / R&S ZVB / R&S GUI Reference Trace Menu (Trace – Markers are available for all diagram types Format). Marker 1/2/3 Creates the markers numbered 1, 2, and 3, respectively, and assigns them to the active trace (toggle function).
  • Page 217 ® ® ® R&S ZVA / R&S ZVB / R&S GUI Reference Trace Menu CALCulate<Chn>:MARKer<Mk>:REFerence:X CALCulate<Chn>:MARKer<Mk>:REFerence:Y? Delta Mode Converts the active marker to a delta marker so that its values are measured and indicated relative to the function). A Δ sign placed in front of the marker line indicates that the marker is reference marker (toggle in Delta Mode.
  • Page 218 ® ® R&S ZVA / R&S ZVB / R&S GUI Reference Trace Menu the same number or reference markers) are positioned to the same stimulus values but keep their independent format and type settings. When a trace with markers is selected as the active trace and marker coupling is switched on, the following happens: ...
  • Page 219 ® ® R&S ZVA / R&S ZVB / R&S GUI Reference Trace Menu All marker formats are available irrespective of the measured quantity. The output values are calculated by a simple conversion of a complex measurement result, where the marker format defines the conversion rules.
  • Page 220 ® ® ® R&S ZVA / R&S ZVB / R&S GUI Reference Trace Menu CALCulate<Chn>:MARKer<Mk>:FORMat ... Remote control: More Markers Opens a submenu to create the markers numbered 4 to 10. The markers are analogous to marker no. 1 to CALCulate<Chn>:MARKer<Mk>[:STATe] ON...
  • Page 221 ® ® ® R&S ZVA / R&S ZVB / R&S GUI Reference Trace Menu  Fixed Marker freezes the current response value of the selected marker. The marker can still be shifted horizontally but the vertical position remains fixed if the other marker settings are changed.

  • Page 222: Search

    ® ® ® R&S ZVA / R&S ZVB / R&S GUI Reference Trace Menu Search The Search menu uses markers to locate specific points on the trace. Search functions The search functions are tools for searching measurement data according to specific criteria. A search...
  • Page 223 ® ® ® R&S ZVA / R&S ZVB / R&S GUI Reference Trace Menu  Search Range... assigns a search range to each marker of the current trace. Trace – The search functions are available in all Cartesian and polar diagram types (see Format).
  • Page 224 ® ® ® R&S ZVA / R&S ZVB / R&S GUI Reference Trace Menu Peak Search > Sets the active marker to the next peak with higher stimulus value. If the active trace contains no markers, a marker M 1 created to indicate the search result. The peak criteria are defined via Define Peak.
  • Page 225 ® ® R&S ZVA / R&S ZVB / R&S GUI Reference Trace Menu If the target value occurs at several stimulus values, the marker is placed to the search result with the smallest stimulus value. The other measurement points with the same target value can be located using Target Search >...
  • Page 226 ® ® R&S ZVA / R&S ZVB / R&S GUI Reference Trace Menu It is possible to define up to ten different target values for each trace and assign them to the markers no. 1 to 10. The input fields in the Target Search dialog are used to select the markers and define the associated search ranges: ...
  • Page 227 ® ® ® R&S ZVA / R&S ZVB / R&S GUI Reference Trace Menu  Bandpass Search Ref to Max activates the search for a bandpass region in the active trace.  Bandpass Search Ref to Marker activates the search for a bandpass region in the active trace, starting at the position of the active marker.
  • Page 228 ® ® ® R&S ZVA / R&S ZVB / R&S GUI Reference Trace Menu  M 1 indicates the maximum of the peak (Max).  M 2 indicates the point on the left edge of the peak where the trace value is equal to the maximum minus x dB Bandwidth (Lower Band Edge, LBE).
  • Page 229 ® ® R&S ZVA / R&S ZVB / R&S GUI Reference Trace Menu In contrast to a Bandpass Search Ref to Max, the Bandpass Search Ref to Marker does not change the position of the active markers. The Loss is the response value at the marker position; the bandfilter search...
  • Page 230 ® ® ® R&S ZVA / R&S ZVB / R&S GUI Reference Trace Menu  M 1 indicates the minimum of the peak (Min).  M 2 indicates the point on the left edge of the peak where the trace value is equal to the maximum in the search range (passband value) minus x dB Bandwidth (Lower Band Edge, LBE).
  • Page 231 ® ® ® R&S ZVA / R&S ZVB / R&S GUI Reference Trace Menu x dB Bandwidth Opens the numeric entry bar for the minimum excursion of the bandpass and bandstop peaks.  A bandpass peak must fall off on both sides by the specified x dB Bandwidth to be considered a valid peak.
  • Page 232 ® ® ® R&S ZVA / R&S ZVB / R&S GUI Reference Trace Menu CALCulate<Chn>:MARKer<Mk>:FUNCtion:DOMain:USER Remote control: CALCulate<Chn>:MARKer<Mk>:FUNCtion:DOMain:USER:STARt CALCulate<Chn>:MARKer<Mk>:FUNCtion:DOMain:USER:STOP Search Markers and Result Off Hides the info field with the results of a bandpass or a bandstop search and disables bandfiter tracking.
  • Page 233 ® ® ® R&S ZVA / R&S ZVB / R&S GUI Reference Trace Menu equal to the marker response value minus n dB.  Upper Band Edge is the closest frequency above the active marker position where the trace is equal to the marker response value minus n dB.
  • Page 234 ® ® ® R&S ZVA / R&S ZVB / R&S GUI Reference Trace Menu Search Range Dialog Allows to create or delete markers for the active trace and to define a search range for each marker. To create a marker, select it from the Marker combo-box and tick the On checkbox. Then, in the Modify Search Range section, select a range for the marker search and use the input fields to modify the selected range.
  • Page 235 ® ® ® R&S ZVA / R&S ZVB / R&S GUI Reference Trace Menu Range Limit Lines On is a channel setting, i.e. it not is limited to a particular trace, diagram, marker or range.  Marker/On Marker selects one of the ten markers that can be assigned to a trace. If the selected marker does not yet exist, it is created as soon as On is ticked.

  • Page 236: Marker Funct

    ® ® R&S ZVA / R&S ZVB / R&S GUI Reference Trace Menu Sweep Progress tracking means that the active marker follows the latest valid measurement points and thus monitors the sweep progress. This complements the progress indication in the status bar below the diagram area.
  • Page 237 ® ® ® R&S ZVA / R&S ZVB / R&S GUI Reference Trace Menu  Span = Marker sets the span of the sweep range equal to the active delta marker value. The following functions use the response value of the active marker to scale the y-axis of the diagram: ...

  • Page 238: Lines

    ® ® ® R&S ZVA / R&S ZVB / R&S GUI Reference Trace Menu Max = Marker Sets the upper edge of the diagram equal to the response value of the active marker, leaving its lower edge unchanged. The vertical divisions (Scale Div.) are adjusted accordingly.
  • Page 239 ® ® R&S ZVA / R&S ZVB / R&S GUI Reference Trace Menu between the measured quantity and the sweep variable (stimulus variable). Similar to this segmentation, ripple limits may be defined in several ranges. The limit lines can be stored to a file and recalled. Data or memory traces can be used to define the segments of an upper or lower limit line.
  • Page 240 ® ® ® R&S ZVA / R&S ZVB / R&S GUI Reference Trace Menu  To define a limit line with only a few segments, use Add Segment and edit each segment in the segment table individually.  Use the multiselection feature to edit several limit line segments at the same time.
  • Page 241 ® ® ® R&S ZVA / R&S ZVB / R&S GUI Reference Trace Menu trace file is selected, the Properties of Imported Segments dialog with further global import options is opened. Imported traces are polygonal curves with n points and n – 1 segments. The number of points n is set via Channel –...
  • Page 242 ® ® ® R&S ZVA / R&S ZVB / R&S GUI Reference Trace Menu The context menu provides the following functions:  Modification of all entries in the segment table: Type, start and stop values for the stimulus and response variable.
  • Page 243 ® ® ® R&S ZVA / R&S ZVB / R&S GUI Reference Trace Menu As a consequence of the limit line rules, the limit check will always pass a DUT if no limit lines are defined. File Import Settings The Properties of Imported Segments dialog appears before a trace is imported into the Define Limit Line dialog.
  • Page 244 ® ® ® R&S ZVA / R&S ZVB / R&S GUI Reference Trace Menu is described by the limit line file: MMEMory:LOAD:LIMit "Trc_name","file_name" Remote control: MMEMory:STORe:LIMit "Trc_name","file_name" Show Limit Line Shows or hides the limit line associated with the active trace in a Cartesian diagram area. A checkmark appears next to the menu item when the limit line is shown.
  • Page 245 ® ® ® R&S ZVA / R&S ZVB / R&S GUI Reference Trace Menu fail can be generated in addition. Limit check and display of the limit lines are independent of each other: With disabled limit check, the limit line can still be displayed.
  • Page 246 ® ® ® R&S ZVA / R&S ZVB / R&S GUI Reference Trace Menu ripple of a filter is within acceptable limits, irrespective of the actual transmitted power in the passband. See also background information for Limit Lines.  Define Ripple Test...
  • Page 247 ® ® ® R&S ZVA / R&S ZVB / R&S GUI Reference Trace Menu individually.  Use the Align All Ranges button to create non-overlapping, contiguous ranges of equal width.  Use the multiselection feature to edit several ranges at the same time.
  • Page 248 ® ® ® R&S ZVA / R&S ZVB / R&S GUI Reference Trace Menu  Start Stimulus is the smallest stimulus (x-axis) value of the range.  Stop Stimulus is the largest stimulus (x-axis) value of the range.  Ripple Limit is the maximum allowed difference between the largest and the smallest trace value in the range.
  • Page 249 ® ® ® R&S ZVA / R&S ZVB / R&S GUI Reference Trace Menu a maximum of flexibility:  Ranges do not have to be sorted in ascending or descending order (e.g. the Start Stimulus value of range no. n doesn't have to be smaller than the Start Stimulus value of range no. n+1).
  • Page 250 ® ® ® R&S ZVA / R&S ZVB / R&S GUI Reference Trace Menu Show Ripple Limits Shows or hides the ripple limit lines associated with the active trace in a Cartesian diagram area. A checkmark appears next to the menu item when the limit line is shown.
  • Page 251 ® ® ® R&S ZVA / R&S ZVB / R&S GUI Reference Trace Menu Show All Ripple Results Shows or hides the info field for all traces in the active setup, irrespective of the active trace. If Show Result All Traces is disabled (and the ripple check is on), the info field covers the active trace only.
  • Page 252 ® ® R&S ZVA / R&S ZVB / R&S GUI Reference Trace Menu If the active trace exceeds the limits, then no TTL signal is generated. It is possible to activate both pass/fail signals for the same trace or assign several traces to a signal.

  • Page 253: Channel Menu

    ® ® ® R&S ZVA / R&S ZVB / R&S GUI Reference Channel Menu Use the analyzer's drag-and-drop functionality to move the horizontal line symbol to the desired position. CALCulate<Chn>:DLINe:STATe ON | OFF Remote control: CALCulate<Chn>:DLINe Channel Menu The Channel menu provides all channel settings and the functions to activate, modify and store different channels.

  • Page 254: Stimulus

    ® ® ® R&S ZVA / R&S ZVB / R&S GUI Reference Channel Menu Stimulus The Stimulus submenu defines the sweep range in the current channel, depending on the sweep type.  In Cartesian diagrams, the sweep range corresponds to the diagram width and defines the scaling of the x-axis.
  • Page 255 ® ® ® R&S ZVA / R&S ZVB / R&S GUI Reference Channel Menu [SENSe<Ch>:]FREQuency:STOP control: [SENSe<Ch>:]FREQuency:CENTer [SENSe<Ch>:]FREQuency:SPAN SYSTem:FREQuency? (query frequency range of the network analyzer) Stimulus and Sweep Types The function of the Start, Stop, Center and Span softkeys depends on the sweep type:...

  • Page 256: Power Bandwidth Average

    ® ® ® R&S ZVA / R&S ZVB / R&S GUI Reference Channel Menu  Time The Stop value represents the total sweep time. Start and the other parameters are not active as the sweep time is relative to the beginning of the sweep which starts immediately after the entry of the Stop value.
  • Page 257 ® ® ® R&S ZVA / R&S ZVB / R&S GUI Reference Channel Menu  Power defines the power of the internal signal source.  Step Attenuators sets the attenuation for all received and generated waves.  Step Atten. b2 sets the attenuation for the received wave b2.
  • Page 258 SOURce<Ch>:POWer[:LEVel][:IMMediate][:AMPlitude] Remote control: Step Attenuators (R&S ZVA, R&S ZVT20, and R&S ZVB Analyzers) Opens a dialog to set the attenuation for the received and generated waves. The generator attenuation can be set automatically; see Automatic generator attenuation below.
  • Page 259 ® ® ® R&S ZVA / R&S ZVB / R&S GUI Reference Channel Menu Noise" setting minimizes the broadband noise, especially at low signal levels and for analyzers with a large frequency range; see background information below.  Src Pwr Result displays the source power according to the current channel and generator attenuator settings.
  • Page 260 ® ® ® R&S ZVA / R&S ZVB / R&S GUI Reference Channel Menu  The port-specific generator step attenuator setting a step If everything is expressed in dB units, the output power p at each port must be equal to the sum of the...
  • Page 261 ® ® ® R&S ZVA / R&S ZVB / R&S GUI Reference Channel Menu INPut<Pt>:ATTenuation Remote [SENSe<Ch>:]POWer:ATTenuation ARECeiver | BRECeiver | CRECeiver | control: DRECeiver, <attenuation> OUTPut<Pt>:ATTenuation SOURce<Ch>:POWer<Pt>:ATTenuation SOURce<Ch>:POWer<Pt>:ATTenuation:AUTO ON | OFF SOURce<Ch>:POWer<Pt>:ATTenuation:MODE AUTO | LNOise | MANual SOURce<Ch>:POWer<Pt>:ATTenuation:AUTO:VALue? Step Atten. b2 (R&S ZVA Analyzers) Opens the numeric entry bar to set the attenuation for the received wave b2.
  • Page 262 ® ® ® R&S ZVA / R&S ZVB / R&S GUI Reference Channel Menu Meas. Bandwidth Sets the measurement bandwidth of the IF filter. Meas Bandwidth opens a submenu to select bandwidths between 10 Hz and 1 MHz: Fine Adjust... opens a dialog where you can modify the selected measurement bandwidth and the selectivity of the IF filter.
  • Page 263 ® ® ® R&S ZVA / R&S ZVB / R&S GUI Reference Channel Menu The characteristics of the high selectivity filter makes it particularly suitable for isolating unexpected spurious responses or known mixer products. Bandwidth reduction at low frequencies To reduce the trace noise at small frequencies, the analyzer adjusts the IF bandwidths when its receiver frequency falls below a threshold value.
  • Page 264 ® ® ® R&S ZVA / R&S ZVB / R&S GUI Reference Channel Menu In general, the system error correction is no longer valid after a change of the IF filter bandwidth. The message Cal? appears in the trace list.
  • Page 265 ® ® ® R&S ZVA / R&S ZVB / R&S GUI Reference Channel Menu [SENSe<Ch>:]AVERage:CLEar ALC Config Enables and configures the Automatic Level Control (ALC) for the current channel. ALC keeps the level of the a waves (source level) at a constant value, irrespective of the DUT's input impedance. The measurement speed is slightly reduced.
  • Page 266 ® ® ® R&S ZVA / R&S ZVB / R&S GUI Reference Channel Menu  Control Loop Parameters define the tuning coefficients of the Proportional-Integral (PI) controller the analyzer uses as a feedback controller for ALC. By default the parameters are automatically selected (Coefficients=Auto). With automatic selection of the ALC Path IF Bandwidth this is the only option.

  • Page 267: Sweep

    ® ® R&S ZVA / R&S ZVB / R&S GUI Reference Channel Menu This tooltip is displayed if ALC is enabled at a port that doesn't have a source power calibration. For valid start values it is recommended to perform a Flatness Cal on every ALC port.
  • Page 268 ® ® ® R&S ZVA / R&S ZVB / R&S GUI Reference Channel Menu A sweep is a series of consecutive measurements taken over a specified sequence of stimulus values. It represents the basic measurement cycle of the analyzer. The analyzer can perform sweeps at constant power but variable frequency (frequency sweeps), sweeps at constant frequency but variable power (power sweeps), and sweeps at constant power and frequency that are repeated in time (Time/CW Mode sweeps);...
  • Page 269 ® ® ® R&S ZVA / R&S ZVB / R&S GUI Reference Channel Menu  Lin. Frequency is the default sweep type. The stimulus frequency is swept in equidistant steps over the continuous frequency range. In a Cartesian diagram, the x-axis is a linear frequency axis.
  • Page 270 ® ® ® R&S ZVA / R&S ZVB / R&S GUI Reference Channel Menu [SENSe<Ch>:]SWEep:TYPE LINear Remote control: [SENSe<Chn>:]FUNCtion[:ON] "XFRequency:..." Log. Frequency In a Log. Frequency sweep the stimulus frequency is swept on a logarithmic scale over the continuous frequency range. The frequency range (sweep range) is defined with the Stimulus settings.
  • Page 271 ® ® ® R&S ZVA / R&S ZVB / R&S GUI Reference Channel Menu independently for the individual segments. Due to this flexibility Segmented Frequency sweeps are suitable for any detailed analysis of a DUT at specified frequencies. In a Cartesian diagram the measurement result is displayed as a trace over a linear frequency scale ranging from the lowest to the highest frequency point of all segments.
  • Page 272 ® ® R&S ZVA / R&S ZVB / R&S GUI Reference Channel Menu The power corresponds to the actual output power at the test port that supplies the stimulus for the active channel or at the calibrated reference plane. Any generator power calibration or attenuation of the active generator step attenuators is taken into account.
  • Page 273 ® ® R&S ZVA / R&S ZVB / R&S GUI Reference Channel Menu The analyzer tries to keep the time intervals between any two consecutive time sweep points equal: The time sweep samples are equidistant. For unidirectional measurements, time sweeps up to the maximum number of 60001 sweep points are generally equidistant.
  • Page 274 ® ® ® R&S ZVA / R&S ZVB / R&S GUI Reference Channel Menu characteristics in time: Sweep time The time interval between two consecutive trigger pulses must not be smaller than the minimum measurement time for one measurement point described for Time sweeps.
  • Page 275 ® ® ® R&S ZVA / R&S ZVB / R&S GUI Reference Channel Menu  Inserting and Deleting Segments  Individual Segment Settings  Point List, Segment Import and Export Columns in the Define Segments table The table contains an automatically assigned current number for each segment plus the following editable or non-editable columns: ...
  • Page 276 ® ® R&S ZVA / R&S ZVB / R&S GUI Reference Channel Menu segment numbers (#) of all segments after the new segment are adapted. The new segment ranges from the Stop value of the previously active segment to the maximum frequency of the analyzer.
  • Page 277 ® ® ® R&S ZVA / R&S ZVB / R&S GUI Reference Channel Menu for selected segments. If Trig is unchecked for a particular segment, all triggers within this segment are inactive: it will be sweeped in one go, immediately after the previous one.
  • Page 278 ® ® R&S ZVA / R&S ZVB / R&S GUI Reference Channel Menu Points in inactive sweep segments (i.e. segments that are not switched On in the segment table) are not shown. The table provides a check of the settings made and can not be edited.
  • Page 279 ® ® ® R&S ZVA / R&S ZVB / R&S GUI Reference Channel Menu The sweep segment file actually contains more columns listing all channel settings of the individual sweep segments. The headings of the additional columns read:  Source Power [dBm]; IF Bandwidth [Hz]; enIF Selectivity; en IF Sideband; Meas Delay [ boSweep Time Auto;...
  • Page 280 ® ® R&S ZVA / R&S ZVB / R&S GUI Reference Channel Menu The spectrum of a pulsed signal in the frequency domain has a sin(x)/x envelope, where x is proportional to the duty cycle. The spectral components are equidistant with a spacing of 1/PRP.
  • Page 281 ® ® ® R&S ZVA / R&S ZVB / R&S GUI Reference Channel Menu Pulse Profile Pulse Profile measurements are performed at constant receiver frequency and stimulus power; see background information on pulse profile mode. Pulsed measurements require a trigger signal that is synchronized to the analyzed pulses.
  • Page 282 ® ® ® R&S ZVA / R&S ZVB / R&S GUI Reference Channel Menu time to 25 ms. The Stimulus parameters define fixed source and receiver settings for the pulse profile measurement. The parameter settings are also valid for other sweep types.
  • Page 283 ® ® ® R&S ZVA / R&S ZVB / R&S GUI Reference Channel Menu Receiver and source ports scan be selected although they may not be currently used. The analyzer can store predefined receiver settings for arbitrary port configurations. ...
  • Page 284 ® ® ® R&S ZVA / R&S ZVB / R&S GUI Reference Channel Menu Mean Value of Pulse Section has the following effect:  The trace for the wave quantity assigned to the active receiver is replaced by a constant trace.
  • Page 285 ® ® ® R&S ZVA / R&S ZVB / R&S GUI Reference Channel Menu Remote control: Settings can be retrieved using the query form of the commands. Pulse Generator (R&S ZVA and R&S ZVT) Turns the pulse generator on or off (with option R&S ZVA-K27). The pulse generator provides two...
  • Page 286 ® ® ® R&S ZVA / R&S ZVB / R&S GUI Reference Channel Menu If not specified otherwise, the pulse generator settings are channel-specific. A measurement example for pulse generators and pulsed measurements is reported in the Getting Started guide for the extension unit R&S ZVAX24, to be found on the R&S ZVA/B/T documentation CD- ROM.
  • Page 287 ® ® ® R&S ZVA / R&S ZVB / R&S GUI Reference Channel Menu specification. When a Constant High or Constant Low signal is selected, the pulse type of the sync signal is set to Constant High or Constant Low, too. The previous pulse type of the sync signal is restored when the pulse generator signal is reset to Single Pulse or Pulse Train.
  • Page 288 ® ® R&S ZVA / R&S ZVB / R&S GUI Reference Channel Menu The Define Pulse Train dialog contains a table to edit the individual pulse segments; see below. The buttons below the table extend, shorten, or re-order the segment list.
  • Page 289 ® ® R&S ZVA / R&S ZVB / R&S GUI Reference Channel Menu The sync signal is either a single pulse signal with definite pulse width (Sync Width), following the pulse generator signal by a specified Sync Delay (to Pulse), or a constant signal. Constant signals (Constant High and Constant Low) need no further specification.
  • Page 290 ® ® ® R&S ZVA / R&S ZVB / R&S GUI Reference Channel Menu Chopped pulse profile results are measured as follows: 1. The signal is chopped into k measurement intervals of equal width. The interval width is equal to the time resolution.
  • Page 291 ® ® ® R&S ZVA / R&S ZVB / R&S GUI Reference Channel Menu  Off disables the chopped pulse profile mode. All other settings are left unchanged. In remote control it is possible to skip measurement intervals (and thus accelerate the measurement, at the expense of the number of sweep points) by increasing the Delay Increment parameter.
  • Page 292 ® ® ® R&S ZVA / R&S ZVB / R&S GUI Reference Channel Menu Define Segments. As an alternative to the Number of Points, the Stimulus Step Size can be set. Measurement time and screen resolution A large number of points improves the resolution of the trace but increases the measurement time.
  • Page 293 ® ® ® R&S ZVA / R&S ZVB / R&S GUI Reference Channel Menu  Auto minimizes the sweep time. If this option is checked, the input fields Sweep Time and Meas. Delay can not be edited. Sweep Time indicates the estimated sweep time, taking into account the current measurement settings, the Meas.
  • Page 294 ® ® R&S ZVA / R&S ZVB / R&S GUI Reference Channel Menu Any trigger event may start an entire sweep or a part of it. Moreover, it is possible to switch off the RF source between consecutive triggered measurement sequences, and to define a delay between trigger events and the measurement sequences.
  • Page 295 ® ® ® R&S ZVA / R&S ZVB / R&S GUI Reference Channel Menu The period of the external trigger signal should be adjusted to the triggered measurement sequence. If the analyzer receives a trigger event while the last sequence is still running, the trigger event is skipped and a message Trigger event missed is displayed.
  • Page 296 ® ® ® R&S ZVA / R&S ZVB / R&S GUI Reference Channel Menu The periodic trigger is incompatible with Time sweeps: If a Time sweep is selected while the periodic trigger is active, the analyzer generates an error message: To continue, click OK and select any other trigger or sweep type (e.g.
  • Page 297 ® ® ® R&S ZVA / R&S ZVB / R&S GUI Reference Channel Menu Triggered Meas. Sequence Selects the measurement cycle or sequence of actions to be triggered.  Sweep means that each trigger event starts an entire sweep, according to the current sweep configuration.
  • Page 298 ® ® ® R&S ZVA / R&S ZVB / R&S GUI Reference Channel Menu The delay time entered must be zero or positive, so that the trigger event precedes the start of the measurement (post-trigger). TRIGger[:SEQuence]:HOLDoff Remote control: TRIGger[:SEQuence]:HOLDoff:GENerator<Gen> TRIGger[:SEQuence]:HOLDoff:MODE TRIGger[:SEQuence]:HOLDoff:PORT<Pt>...
  • Page 299 ® ® ® R&S ZVA / R&S ZVB / R&S GUI Reference Channel Menu  Number of Sweeps selects the number of sweeps to be measured in single sweep mode: either one (Single Sweep) or a group of consecutive sweeps.

  • Page 300: Mode

    ® ® ® R&S ZVA / R&S ZVB / R&S GUI Reference Channel Menu preparation and subsequent data processing stages. OUTPut<Ch>:UPORt:BUSY:LINK Remote control: Mode The Mode menu defines the properties of the physical and logical (balanced) test ports, configures the source signals and the receiver, and provides special measurement modes.
  • Page 301 ® ® ® R&S ZVA / R&S ZVB / R&S GUI Reference Channel Menu embedding/deembedding a DUT with single ended or balanced ports.  Defined Coherence Mode... activates the operating mode where the analyzer generates several continuous signals with specific relative amplitude and phase (with option R&S ZVA-K6, True Differential Mode) ...
  • Page 302 ® ® R&S ZVA / R&S ZVB / R&S GUI Reference Channel Menu can either be a source and receive port or a pure receive port (RF Off in the Source section). Measurements do not necessarily require all of the physical or logical ports of the network analyzer. To save measurement time, it is recommended to restrict the measurement to the ports that are actually needed.
  • Page 303 ® ® ® R&S ZVA / R&S ZVB / R&S GUI Reference Channel Menu SOURce<Ch>:GROup<group_no>:PORTs Remote control: [SENSe<Ch>:]CORRection:COLLect:CONNection:PORTs ALL | SINGle [SENSe<Ch>:]CORRection:COLLect:CONNection:GENDers ALL | SINGle [SENSe<Ch>:]FREQuency:CONVersion:AWReceiver[:STATe] Logical Port Defines the properties of the logical (balanced) ports defined in the Balanced Port and Port Groups dialog.
  • Page 304 ® ® ® R&S ZVA / R&S ZVB / R&S GUI Reference Channel Menu CALCulate<Chn>:TRANsform:IMPedance:RNORmal TWAVes | PWAVes Physical Port Shows and/or defines the properties of the physical (unbalanced) ports of the analyzer.  # is the test port number of the analyzer as shown on the front panel. External...
  • Page 305 ® ® ® R&S ZVA / R&S ZVB / R&S GUI Reference Channel Menu Frequencies. This option is available for ZVA and ZVT network analyzers only.  RF Off switches the RF signal source at the port off (box checked) or on for measurements in the related channel.
  • Page 306 ® ® ® R&S ZVA / R&S ZVB / R&S GUI Reference Channel Menu generator. The port-specific frequency for frequency converter ports can be defined in a separate dialog; see Converter Port <n> Frequency. Coupled test ports For most R&S ZVA analyzers ports 2k-1 and 2k are supplied by a common generator as shown below.
  • Page 307 ® ® ® R&S ZVA / R&S ZVB / R&S GUI Reference Channel Menu  PCor Off enables or disables a source power calibration for an individual port. This function is available only for ports where a source power calibration is available. It is identical with Source...
  • Page 308 ® ® ® R&S ZVA / R&S ZVB / R&S GUI Reference Channel Menu Most of the settings in this section require option ZVA-K4, Arbitrary Generator and Receiver Frequencies. This option is available for ZVA and ZVT network analyzers only.
  • Page 309 ® ® ® R&S ZVA / R&S ZVB / R&S GUI Reference Channel Menu Control, AGC). The A/D converter is always operated at optimum input level. The following settings accelerate the measurement:  Low Dist(ortion) corresponds to a small IF gain (i.e. a lower internal A/D converter input level).
  • Page 310 ® ® ® R&S ZVA / R&S ZVB / R&S GUI Reference Channel Menu Relation between channel frequency and port frequencies The stimulus frequency f is defined by the following sweep settings:  For a frequency sweep or segmented frequency sweep, the channel frequency is equal to the stimulus range.
  • Page 311 ® ® ® R&S ZVA / R&S ZVB / R&S GUI Reference Channel Menu SOURce<Ch>:FREQuency<Pt>:CONVersion:ARBitrary:CFRequency Remote control: Port <n> Power The Port <n> Power dialog defines the port-specific source power. This is either a power range (for power sweeps) or a fixed power (for frequency and CW sweeps). The general purpose of the port power settings is to ensure a definite signal power at the input of the DUT, considering all possible sources of power variations in the test setup.
  • Page 312 ® ® R&S ZVA / R&S ZVB / R&S GUI Reference Channel Menu constant input power of +35 dBm is maintained across the entire sweep range. The actual output power of the analyzer is +5 dBm but the Port Power Result value shows the correct power value of +35 dBm at the DUT.
  • Page 313 ® ® ® R&S ZVA / R&S ZVB / R&S GUI Reference Channel Menu SOURce<Ch>:POWer<Pt>:CORRection:LEVel:OFFSet (for Cal Power Offset) SOURce<Ch>:POWer<Pt>:CORRection:GENerator<Gen>:LEVel:OFFSet (for Cal Power Offset) Converter Port <n> Power (R&S ZVA and R&S ZVT) The Converter Port <n> Power dialog displays the port-specific source power for frequency converter ports.
  • Page 314 ® ® ® R&S ZVA / R&S ZVB / R&S GUI Reference Channel Menu  (Un)checking Logical Port, Source or Receiver displays (removes) the corresponding sections in (from) the Port Configuration table.  (Un)checking one of the second-level boxes displays (removes) the corresponding column in (from) the Port Configuration table.
  • Page 315 ® ® ® R&S ZVA / R&S ZVB / R&S GUI Reference Channel Menu Sweep Type Frequency parameters Power parameters Segmented Frequency – (defined by the sweep segments) CW Power Start Stop Time CW Mode The frequencies and power levels are displayed in two separate but analogous panels: ...
  • Page 316 ® ® R&S ZVA / R&S ZVB / R&S GUI Reference Channel Menu balanced state and virtually separate the differential and common mode signals. The analyzer measures the unbalanced state but converts the results and calculates mixed mode parameters, e.g.
  • Page 317 ® ® R&S ZVA / R&S ZVB / R&S GUI Reference Channel Menu The port configurations are arranged in a scrollable list and selected with a mouse click. The resulting port number assignment is shown on the left-hand side of the Balanced Ports and Port Groups dialog and in Port Configuration dialog.
  • Page 318 ® ® R&S ZVA / R&S ZVB / R&S GUI Reference Channel Menu It is possible to combine any pair of two physical analyzer ports. An n-port analyzer supports a maximum of n/2 (n even) or (n – 1)/2 (n odd) logical ports.
  • Page 319 ® ® ® R&S ZVA / R&S ZVB / R&S GUI Reference Channel Menu SOURce<Ch>:LPORt<log_port> <phys_port1>,<phys_port2> Remote SENSe:LPORT<log_port>:ZCOMmon <real> [,<imaginary] control: SENSe:LPORT<log_port>:ZDIFferent <real> [,<imaginary] SOURce<Ch>:TDIF[:STATe] ON | OFF Dissolve Bal. Port The Dissolve tab of the Balanced Ports and Port Groups dialog reestablishes a single-ended (unbalanced) port configuration where logical ports correspond to (single) physical ports.
  • Page 320 ® ® ® R&S ZVA / R&S ZVB / R&S GUI Reference Channel Menu is made up of frequency converter ports, power control must be active for both of them (i.e. the power control method must not be set to None or Mechanical Attenuator).
  • Page 321 ® ® R&S ZVA / R&S ZVB / R&S GUI Reference Channel Menu 2. R&S ZVA24/40/67 with 4 ports and 4 generators All ports are independent. Possible connection: Analyzer port 1 to RF IN (converter 1), analyzer port 2 to RF IN (converter 2), analyzer port 3 is not used, analyzer port 4 provides the LO IN signal for both converters (via an external power splitter).
  • Page 322 ® ® ® R&S ZVA / R&S ZVB / R&S GUI Reference Channel Menu when the first port group is deleted) the deleted one. If exactly two port groups exist, pressing the Delete Group button will delete both groups. Only ports whose Meas flags are set in the Port Configuration table can be assigned to a port group.
  • Page 323 ® ® R&S ZVA / R&S ZVB / R&S GUI Reference Channel Menu This tab contains the following controls to activate/deactivate the frequency offset and to specify the minimum frequency offset between different port groups. For a more detailed explanation about how this...
  • Page 324 ® ® ® R&S ZVA / R&S ZVB / R&S GUI Reference Channel Menu  In the first measurement step no measurements for port group 1 will be performed, measurements for port group 2 will be performed at 100 MHz.
  • Page 325 ® ® ® R&S ZVA / R&S ZVB / R&S GUI Reference Channel Menu  Linear frequency sweep or segment within segmented sweep from 100 MHz to 112 MHz  4 sweep points resulting in a frequency spacing of 4 MHz ...
  • Page 326 ® ® R&S ZVA / R&S ZVB / R&S GUI Reference Channel Menu RF mixers convert an RF signal at one frequency into a signal at another frequency. The frequency to be shifted is applied at the RF input and the frequency shifting signal (from a local oscillator, LO) is applied to the RF mixer's LO port, resulting in an output signal at the mixer's Intermediate Frequency (IF) port.
  • Page 327 ® ® ® R&S ZVA / R&S ZVB / R&S GUI Reference Channel Menu 1145.1110.28/48) can be used for this measurement. For other network analyzer types an additional external generator is required. A standard mixer measurement with a single mixer stage and no frequency multipliers corresponds to the figure above with the second mixer and LO 2 omitted and m = 1.
  • Page 328 ® ® ® R&S ZVA / R&S ZVB / R&S GUI Reference Channel Menu The upper part the Define Mixer Measurement dialog shows a diagram with the RF and LO signals, the mixing product (IF), and the current frequency and power ranges for all signals. The diagram is adjusted according to the selected Converter Stages;...
  • Page 329 ® ® ® R&S ZVA / R&S ZVB / R&S GUI Reference Channel Menu  Define Correction selects the system error correction type for the scalar mixer measurement. Select the appropriate correction type according to your accuracy and speed requirements; see table below.
  • Page 330 ® ® R&S ZVA / R&S ZVB / R&S GUI Reference Channel Menu analyzer (at one of the ports that are not used for the RF and IF signals) or by an external source. A test setup with two mixers involves two independent LO signals at both mixers.
  • Page 331 ® ® ® R&S ZVA / R&S ZVB / R&S GUI Reference Channel Menu  IF signal (right side): Analyzer port number (e.g. Port 2), fixed frequency = (RF + LO) or |RF – LO|, expected power range.  Time or CW mode sweep The following mixer signal diagram corresponds to a Time or CW Mode sweep.
  • Page 332 ® ® ® R&S ZVA / R&S ZVB / R&S GUI Reference Channel Menu The diagram contains the mixer signal diagram with the current power levels or power ranges and a Port Power table with the following columns:  Port contains the RF and IF ports and one or two LO ports, depending on the number of Converter Stages selected in the mixer measurement dialog.
  • Page 333 ® ® ® R&S ZVA / R&S ZVB / R&S GUI Reference Channel Menu signal) frequency. Restrictions For vector mixer measurements (option R&S ZVA-K5), mixer delay measurements without LO access (option R&S ZVA-K9), and long distance mixer delay measurements (option R&S ZVA-K10), only one LO signal (corresponding to one mixer stage) is supported.
  • Page 334 ® ® ® R&S ZVA / R&S ZVB / R&S GUI Reference Channel Menu  Mixer 1 and Mixer 2 (if present) select the frequency of the signal with automatic frequency definition, see background information below. Conversion formulas The output signal (IF signal) of each mixer can be at the sum or at the difference of the RF and LO input frequencies.
  • Page 335 ® ® ® R&S ZVA / R&S ZVB / R&S GUI Reference Channel Menu Mixer Power Cal... The Scalar Mixer Measurement Power Calibration wizard controls the power calibration of the scalar mixer measurement. A power calibration ensures accurate levels of the mixer input signals (RF and LO source power calibration) and an accurate power measurement of the mixer output signal (IF source or receiver calibration).
  • Page 336 ® ® R&S ZVA / R&S ZVB / R&S GUI Reference Channel Menu Mixer Power Cal procedure: source match or source and load match correction The mixer power calibration for measurements with source match correction and with source and load...
  • Page 337 ® ® ® R&S ZVA / R&S ZVB / R&S GUI Reference Channel Menu  A click in one of the boxes in the list of calibrations in the upper left part of the dialog starts the calibration sweeps for the RF source, IF source or receiver, and the LO source, respectively. The measured power is shown in the diagram to the right and the sweep progress in the message field below.
  • Page 338 ® ® ® R&S ZVA / R&S ZVB / R&S GUI Reference Channel Menu [SENSe<Ch>:]CORRection:POWer<port_no>:MIXer:IF:NFIGure:ACQuire Mixer Cal... Opens a submenu to perform the system error corrections which are required for the enhanced mixer measurement. The calibration can be performed manually or using a calibration unit.
  • Page 339 ® ® ® R&S ZVA / R&S ZVB / R&S GUI Reference Channel Menu measurements also require option R&S ZVA-K5, Vector Mixer Calibration. Moreover, the hardware options R&S ZVA<frequency>-B16, Direct Generator/Receiver Access, must be fitted. Vector mixer measurements In contrast to...
  • Page 340 ® ® ® R&S ZVA / R&S ZVB / R&S GUI Reference Channel Menu  Mixer Power Cal... opens a dialog to perform a power calibration of the signal sources and of the IF receiver.  Mixer Cal... initiates a two-port calibration of the extended test setup including the two additional mixers and the lowpass or highpass filter.
  • Page 341 ® ® R&S ZVA / R&S ZVB / R&S GUI Reference Channel Menu For network analyzers with upper frequency limits above 20 GHz, the lower IF frequency limit is 600 MHz, if the MEAS and REF mixers are connected to port 2. Change the...
  • Page 342 ® ® ® R&S ZVA / R&S ZVB / R&S GUI Reference Channel Menu  The RF signal is the stimulus signal that the analyzer generates with the current channel settings. After a reset the frequency and power of the RF signal is as defined in the Channel – Stimulus menu.
  • Page 343 ® ® ® R&S ZVA / R&S ZVB / R&S GUI Reference Channel Menu Finding the best test setup The alternative test setups place different requirements on the NWA receivers and the additional equipment. Test setup (Aux Mixer) Receiver requirements...
  • Page 344 ® ® R&S ZVA / R&S ZVB / R&S GUI Reference Channel Menu Source power calibration for the IF signal. A power sensor is connected to port 2. The IF power (red) is calibrated over the IF sweep range, calculated from the selected RF sweep range and the LO frequency.
  • Page 345 ® ® ® R&S ZVA / R&S ZVB / R&S GUI Reference Channel Menu  A click in one of the boxes in the list of calibrations in the upper left part of the dialog starts the calibration sweeps for the RF source, IF source, and the LO source, respectively. The measured power is shown in the diagram to the right and the sweep progress in the message field below.
  • Page 346 ® ® ® R&S ZVA / R&S ZVB / R&S GUI Reference Channel Menu the calibration plane; see Power Meter Settings in the Power Calibration section. Power meters (Pmtr1, Pmtr2, ...) must be configured in the System Configuration – External Power Meters dialog before they appear in the list.
  • Page 347 ® ® ® R&S ZVA / R&S ZVB / R&S GUI Reference Channel Menu The mixer vector calibration corresponds to a 2-port UOSM calibration where the unknown through standard is replaced by an unknown calibration mixer. In analogy to the unknown through standard used for UOSM calibration, the calibration mixer must be reciprocal (S If your mixer under test is reciprocal, you can also use it as a calibration mixer.
  • Page 348 ® ® R&S ZVA / R&S ZVB / R&S GUI Reference Channel Menu The dialog shows the active calibration unit and characterization. Click Change Active Calibration Unit or Characterization... to change these settings. The port assignment displayed in the center of the dialog must not be changed.
  • Page 349 ® ® ® R&S ZVA / R&S ZVB / R&S GUI Reference Channel Menu receiver. Mixer Delay Measurement The mixer delay measurement is an extension of the scalar mixer measurement: The network analyzer generates a two-tone RF signal as a mixer input signal and measures the converted IF signal at the mixer output.
  • Page 350 ® ® R&S ZVA / R&S ZVB / R&S GUI Reference Channel Menu available at test port 1 and can be fed to the DUT input. The IF output signal is measured at port 2. It is possible to use an external generator for the upper tone signal, so that two analyzer ports are sufficient.
  • Page 351 ® ® ® R&S ZVA / R&S ZVB / R&S GUI Reference Channel Menu Test setup with external receiver It is also possible to use an external coupler; in analogy to the Test Setup with Internal Receiver, or establish a direct (dedicated) LAN connection between the two analyzers.
  • Page 352 ® ® ® R&S ZVA / R&S ZVB / R&S GUI Reference Channel Menu measurement.  Cal Mixer Delay Meas... opens a dialog to perform a power calibration of the signal sources and of the IF receiver.  Correction Off switches the calibration on or off. To perform a calibration, click the Cal Mixer Delay Meas...
  • Page 353 ® ® ® R&S ZVA / R&S ZVB / R&S GUI Reference Channel Menu - for network analyzers R&S ZVT connected to an Extension Unit R&S ZVAX-TRM with installed combiner option - for network analyzers R&S ZVT20 that are equipped with option R&S ZVT20-B11 With internal combiner, the two-tone signal is available at port 1.
  • Page 354 ® ® ® R&S ZVA / R&S ZVB / R&S GUI Reference Channel Menu Mixer Delay Measurement Setup The Mixer Delay Measurement Setup dialog provides the settings for a test setup with an additional R&S ZVA network analyzer (VNA2), to be used as an external receiver.
  • Page 355 ® ® ® R&S ZVA / R&S ZVB / R&S GUI Reference Channel Menu upper tone. The sweep range settings depend on the active sweep type (frequency or power sweep). The Frequency and Power settings are identical with the Channel – Stimulus settings.
  • Page 356 ® ® ® R&S ZVA / R&S ZVB / R&S GUI Reference Channel Menu The following guidelines will help you find the appropriate calibration method:  For many applications, the "relative" mixer delay of different mixers is a sufficient information.
  • Page 357 ® ® ® R&S ZVA / R&S ZVB / R&S GUI Reference Channel Menu  Load calls up an Open File dialog to load correction data from a file. [SENSe<Ch>]:FREQuency:MDELay:CDMode Remote control: MMEMory:LOAD:MDAData [SENSe<Ch>:]FREQuency:MDELay:CDELay [SENSe<Ch>]:FREQuency:MDELay:DIVide [SENSe<Ch>:]FREQuency:MDELay:ACQuire MMEMory:LOAD:MDCData MMEMory:STORe:MDCData File Format for Mixer Delay Calibration Files The analyzer uses a simple ASCII format to export mixer delay correction data.
  • Page 358 ® ® ® R&S ZVA / R&S ZVB / R&S GUI Reference Channel Menu  In the relative measurement, the nth harmonic of the stimulus signal is divided by 1st harmonic (fundamental) received from the DUT. The result corresponds to the nth harmonic distortion factor.
  • Page 359 ® ® ® R&S ZVA / R&S ZVB / R&S GUI Reference Channel Menu shows the wave quantity b . It is possible, however, to display other quantities and change the trace settings. A label H2 in the channel list indicates that the second harmonic measurement is active.
  • Page 360 ® ® R&S ZVA / R&S ZVB / R&S GUI Reference Channel Menu Use 2nd Harmonic Port1 to Port2 and 3rd Harmonic Port1 to Port2 to activate the measurement of the second and third harmonics with a single menu command.
  • Page 361 ® ® ® R&S ZVA / R&S ZVB / R&S GUI Reference Channel Menu 4. The harmonic trace is hidden (invisible); the relative trace is displayed as a mathematical trace. [SENSe<Ch>:]FREQuency:CONVersion:HARMonic:RELative ON Remote control: Harmonic Power Cal The Harmonic Power Calibration wizard controls the power calibration of the harmonics measurement. A power calibration ensures accurate levels at the input of the DUT (source power calibration) and an accurate power measurement of the harmonic (receiver calibration).
  • Page 362 ® ® R&S ZVA / R&S ZVB / R&S GUI Reference Channel Menu 2. Receiver power calibration for the selected harmonic. No external device is needed. The receiver (port 2) is calibrated at the harmonic frequency using the source signal from port 1 (red) calibrated in the first step.
  • Page 363 ® ® ® R&S ZVA / R&S ZVB / R&S GUI Reference Channel Menu dialog.  Abort Sweep aborts the calibration, e.g. in order to change the sweep settings.  The calibration sweeps are performed according to the settings shown in the Source/Receiver Cal Settings panel below the list of calibrations.
  • Page 364 ® ® R&S ZVA / R&S ZVB / R&S GUI Reference Channel Menu The lower tone signal is generated at port 1, the upper tone is provided by a second source (port 3). Both signals are combined externally and fed to the SOURCE IN connector at port 1. Thus the superimposed signals are available at test port 1 and can be fed to the DUT input.
  • Page 365 ® ® ® R&S ZVA / R&S ZVB / R&S GUI Reference Channel Menu For more details about the test setup see Intermodulation Power Calibration Level Handling. Other analyzer configurations If you use an external combiner but no options R&S ZVA<frequency>-B16, you can still measure the intermodulation products at the output of the DUT.
  • Page 366 ® ® ® R&S ZVA / R&S ZVB / R&S GUI Reference Channel Menu Intermodulation measurement with frequency conversion The intermodulation distortion measurement can be extended to frequency-converting DUTs. E.g. it is possible to feed the two-tone source signal to the RF input of a mixer and measure the intermodulation distortion of the IF output signal, after conversion with an additional LO signal.
  • Page 367 ® ® ® R&S ZVA / R&S ZVB / R&S GUI Reference Channel Menu settings are enabled in the Port Configuration (e.g. it will not work for inverted conversion IF=LO-RF and enhanced wave correction).  Define Intermod Dist Meas... opens a wizard that you can use to configure the intermodulation measurement.
  • Page 368 ® ® ® R&S ZVA / R&S ZVB / R&S GUI Reference Channel Menu  Lower Tone selects an analyzer port as a source of the lower tone signal. If Port 1 is selected as the Two Tone Output, then Port 1 must also provide the lower tone. This condition ensures a consistent receiver power calibration for the intermodulation products at the DUT output port (e.g.
  • Page 369 ® ® ® R&S ZVA / R&S ZVB / R&S GUI Reference Channel Menu Control (ALC). ALC may only be performed if Ext. Dev. is selected as Two Tone Output (otherwise the reference receiver of the upper tone port is not calibrated). Please note that Ext.
  • Page 370 ® ® ® R&S ZVA / R&S ZVB / R&S GUI Reference Channel Menu [SENSe<Ch>:]FREQuency:IMODulation:UTONe [SENSe<Ch>:]FREQuency:IMODulation:TTOutput [SENSe<Ch>:]FREQuency:IMODulation:TDIStance [SENSe<Ch>:]FREQuency:IMODulation:RECeiver [SENSe<Ch>:]BANDwidth|BWIDth[:RESolution] [SENSe<Ch>:]BANDwidth|BWIDth[:RESolution]:SELect [SENSe<Ch>:]FREQuency:IMODulation:ORDer<Im>:STATe [SENSe<Ch>:]FREQuency:IMODulation:PEWCorr[:STATe] Set Frequencies and Powers The Set Frequencies and Powers dialog defines the (frequency or power) sweep ranges for the lower tone.
  • Page 371 ® ® ® R&S ZVA / R&S ZVB / R&S GUI Reference Channel Menu Def CW Mode Intermodulation Spectrum The Def CW Mode Intermodulation Spectrum dialog configures and displays the intermodulation spectrum measurement. The intermodulation spectrum measurement is performed at a fixed frequency of the lower tone (CW Frequency) and the upper tone (CW Frequency + Tone Distance), respectively.
  • Page 372 ® ® ® R&S ZVA / R&S ZVB / R&S GUI Reference Channel Menu [SENSe<Ch>:]FREQuency:CW|FIXed Remote control: [SENSe<Ch>:]FREQuency:IMODulation:TDIStance [SENSe<Ch>:]FREQuency:IMODulation:SPECtrum:MORDer [SENSe<Ch>:]FREQuency:IMODulation:SPECtrum[:STATe] Intermodulation Distortion Measurement Power Calibration The Intermodulation Distortion Measurement Power Calibration wizard controls the power calibration for the intermodulation measurement. A power calibration ensures accurate levels at the input of the DUT (source power calibration for the lower and upper tone) and an accurate power measurement of the intermodulation distortion quantities (receiver calibration).
  • Page 373 ® ® ® R&S ZVA / R&S ZVB / R&S GUI Reference Channel Menu via Prepare Measurement of IM Order in the Define Intermod Dist Meas dialog. These power calibrations are required for the receiver calibration in step 3 (unless Prepare Enhanced Wave Corr was selected in the Define Intermod Dist Meas dialog) and for the measurement of intermodulation products at the DUT input.
  • Page 374 ® ® R&S ZVA / R&S ZVB / R&S GUI Reference Channel Menu The calibration steps for the other test setups are analogous. Refer to the indications in the power calibration dialog for a correct connection of the power meter and the receive port.
  • Page 375 ® ® ® R&S ZVA / R&S ZVB / R&S GUI Reference Channel Menu  Abort Sweep stops the current sweep, e.g. in order to change the sweep settings.  The calibration sweeps are performed according to the settings shown in the Source Cal Settings panel below the list of calibrations.
  • Page 376 ® ® R&S ZVA / R&S ZVB / R&S GUI Reference Channel Menu Larger Port Power Offset values (and hence smaller compensating Cal Power Offset values) may be required e.g. to account for an additional cable loss in the test setup. The maximum source power (depending on the analyzer model and the frequency;...
  • Page 377 ® ® R&S ZVA / R&S ZVB / R&S GUI Reference Channel Menu ranges mentioned above will be calibrated both in the RF and IF range if the Two Tone Output is set to Port 1, and in the IF range only if the Two Tone Output is set to Ext. Dev.
  • Page 378 ® ® R&S ZVA / R&S ZVB / R&S GUI Reference Channel Menu figure measurement can include the effect of the image frequency of the first mixer stage, if so desired. With these assumptions, the mixer noise figure measurement can be performed in close analogy to the noise figure measurement for non-frequency-converting DUTs.
  • Page 379 ® ® ® R&S ZVA / R&S ZVB / R&S GUI Reference Channel Menu is based on a pure thermal noise signal (ΔN = 0): The definition of the noise figure F = (P ) / (P ) = P...
  • Page 380 ® ® ® R&S ZVA / R&S ZVB / R&S GUI Reference Channel Menu Extensions  The network analyzer provides two alternative measurement procedures for maximum flexibility concerning the signal levels or maximum speed. See Sequential vs. Simultaneous measurement. ...
  • Page 381 ® ® ® R&S ZVA / R&S ZVB / R&S GUI Reference Channel Menu The setup guide provides the following panels/steps: 1. DUT Port Connection defines the basic test setup, i.e. the input and output ports of the DUT/NWA. With option R&S ZVA<frequency>-B16, Direct Generator and Receiver Access, it is possible to measure the...
  • Page 382 ® ® ® R&S ZVA / R&S ZVB / R&S GUI Reference Channel Menu 5. Noise Figure Calibration opens the Noise Figure Calibration dialog to assess and compensate the internal noise at the NWA receiver and source. 6. S-Parameter Calibration opens the...
  • Page 383 ® ® ® R&S ZVA / R&S ZVB / R&S GUI Reference Channel Menu The setup guide provides the following panels/steps: 1. Define Mixer Measurement opens the Define Scalar Mixer Measurement dialog. This dialog activates the frequency conversion mode, selects the test ports, and configures the mixer input signals.
  • Page 384 ® ® R&S ZVA / R&S ZVB / R&S GUI Reference Channel Menu In general, it is recommended to calibrate all frequency ranges in all noise figure calibration stages at once to obtain a sufficient set of calibration data (click the higher-level node Port <n> RF... etc.).
  • Page 385 ® ® ® R&S ZVA / R&S ZVB / R&S GUI Reference Channel Menu Define Noise Figure Meas... Provides basic parameters for the noise figure measurement.  Detector Meas Time sets the time that the analyzer uses to acquire data with each of the detector settings (Avg, RMS;...
  • Page 386 ® ® ® R&S ZVA / R&S ZVB / R&S GUI Reference Channel Menu For mixer noise figure measurements (option R&S ZVA-K31), a 50 kHz IF bandwidth is used, and the low phase noise mode is activated. Sequential versus Simultaneous measurement...
  • Page 387 ® ® R&S ZVA / R&S ZVB / R&S GUI Reference Channel Menu measurement, it is also part of the calibration test setup. The dot in the figure below denotes the position of the DUT output in the measurement test setup.
  • Page 388 ® ® ® R&S ZVA / R&S ZVB / R&S GUI Reference Channel Menu  DUT Input and DUT Output denote the input and output ports of the DUT/NWA.  Gen Atten for Src NCal reduces the source level during the source noise calibration (calibration step no.
  • Page 389 ® ® ® R&S ZVA / R&S ZVB / R&S GUI Reference Channel Menu [SENSe<Ch>:]CORRection:COLLect:NFIGure:SAVE [SENSe<Ch>:]CORRection:COLLect:NFIGure:END Correction Off Activates or deactivates the Noise Figure Calibration in the active channel. Correction Off is available only after a calibration has been performed and applied to the active channel.
  • Page 390 ® ® ® R&S ZVA / R&S ZVB / R&S GUI Reference Channel Menu  The measurement uncertainty is not impaired by the tolerances of real test fixtures.  There is no need to fabricate test fixtures with integrated matching circuits for each type of DUT.
  • Page 391 ® ® ® R&S ZVA / R&S ZVB / R&S GUI Reference Channel Menu  Port Overview... opens a dialog providing an overview of all analyzer ports with their reference impedances and transformation networks.  Deembedding/Embedding at Single Ended Port opens the configuration dialog for the single ended circuits and activates or deactivates (de-)embedding.
  • Page 392 ® ® ® R&S ZVA / R&S ZVB / R&S GUI Reference Channel Menu  Deembedding at Balanced Port and Embedding at Balanced Port show the 4-port transformation networks to be numerically added or removed at balanced (logical) ports. Off denotes that no (de)embedding operation is performed.
  • Page 393 ® ® ® R&S ZVA / R&S ZVB / R&S GUI Reference Channel Menu 2. Deembedding at single ended port 3. Deembedding at balanced port 4. Embedding at balanced port 5. Embedding at single ended port Reference Impedances... Changes the reference impedances of the analyzer ports. This is often referred to as renormalization of port impedances.
  • Page 394 ® ® ® R&S ZVA / R&S ZVB / R&S GUI Reference Channel Menu For balanced non waveguide ports it is possible to define separate complex reference impedances for differential and for common mode. The default values for the balanced port reference impedances are derived from the default reference = 50 >Ω):...
  • Page 395 ® ® ® R&S ZVA / R&S ZVB / R&S GUI Reference Channel Menu The renormalized wave quantities (a and b ) and the S-matrix S can be calculated from S and the reference impedances Z .according to two alternative waveguide circuit theories.
  • Page 396 ® ® ® R&S ZVA / R&S ZVB / R&S GUI Reference Channel Menu CALCulate<Chn>:TRANsform:IMPedance:RNORmal TWAVes | PWAVes Embedding/Deembedding at Physical Port Selects a 2-port transformation network for single port (de-)embedding, defines its parameters, assigns it to a physical port and enables (de-)embedding. Single port (de-)embedding can be used for balanced (logical) as well as for single ended (physical) ports.
  • Page 397 ® ® ® R&S ZVA / R&S ZVB / R&S GUI Reference Channel Menu circuit blocks:  A capacitor C connected in parallel with a resistor.  An inductor L connected in series with a resistor. The 2-port transformation networks comprise all possible combinations of 2 basic blocks, where one block represents a serial, the other a shunt element.
  • Page 398 ® ® R&S ZVA / R&S ZVB / R&S GUI Reference Channel Menu it to a physical port and enables (de-)embedding. The two dialogs for deembedding and embedding are identical except for their inverse effect. The dialogs are available only after a...
  • Page 399 ® ® ® R&S ZVA / R&S ZVB / R&S GUI Reference Channel Menu  A capacitor C connected in parallel with a resistor.  An inductor L connected in series with a resistor. The transformation networks comprise various combinations of 3 basic circuit blocks, where two blocks represent serial elements, the third a shunt element.
  • Page 400 ® ® ® R&S ZVA / R&S ZVB / R&S GUI Reference Channel Menu CALCulate<Ch>:TRANsform:VNETworks:BALanced... Remote MMEMory:LOAD:VNETworks<Ch>:BALanced:DEEMbedding<Log_pt> control: '<file_name>', PMAIn, PSECondary MMEMory:LOAD:VNETworks<Ch>:BALanced:EMBedding<Log_pt> '<file_name>', PMAIn, PSECondary Ground Loop (De-)Embedding Selects a ground loop transformation network for (de-)embedding, defines its parameters, and enables (de-)embedding.
  • Page 401 ® ® ® R&S ZVA / R&S ZVB / R&S GUI Reference Channel Menu The Ground Loop (De-)Embedding dialogs contain the following control elements:  (De-)embed DUT enables or disables the (de-)embedding function.  Transformation Network contains all available ground loop networks (see below). Networks are defined either by means of imported S-parameter data or by lumped elements.
  • Page 402 ® ® ® R&S ZVA / R&S ZVB / R&S GUI Reference Channel Menu CALCulate<Ch>:TRANsform:VNETworks:GLOop... Remote MMEMory:LOAD:VNETworks<Ch>:GLOop:DEEMbedding<Ph_pt> control: '<file_name>' MMEMory:LOAD:VNETworks<Ch>:GLOop:EMBedding<Ph_pt> '<file_name>' (De-)Embedding at Port Pair Selects a port pair transformation network for (de-)embedding, defines its parameters, and enables (de- )embedding. Each port pair transformation network is assigned to a pair of single ended (physical) ports.
  • Page 403 ® ® ® R&S ZVA / R&S ZVB / R&S GUI Reference Channel Menu The two 2-port (de-)embedding networks in the figure below require two port pairs 1,2 and 1,3, each combined with an appropriate set of equivalent 4-port S-parameters.
  • Page 404 ® ® ® R&S ZVA / R&S ZVB / R&S GUI Reference Channel Menu Port Numbers of s2p File.  Set to Ideal Through is enabled as long as one of the networks involving two-port or four-port S- parameter data is active. An imported S-parameter set is replaced by the S-parameters of an ideal through connection, which eliminates the transformation network.
  • Page 405 ® ® ® R&S ZVA / R&S ZVB / R&S GUI Reference Channel Menu CALCulate<Ch>:TRANsform:VNETworks:PPAir:DEEMbedding:DEFine Remote control: CALCulate<Ch>:TRANsform:VNETworks:PPAir:DEEMbedding:DELete CALCulate<Ch>:TRANsform:VNETworks:PPAir:EMBedding:DEFine CALCulate<Ch>:TRANsform:VNETworks:PPAir:EMBedding:DELete True Differential Mode (R&S ZVA and R&S ZVT) Differential transmission lines and circuits are widely used, because their characteristics give them a lower susceptibility to electromagnetic interference.
  • Page 406 ® ® ® R&S ZVA / R&S ZVB / R&S GUI Reference Channel Menu or Mechanical Attenuator. Virtual and true differential mode The analyzer uses different stimulus signals and different mathematical methods to obtain results in normal, virtual differential, or true differential mode. The following table gives an overview.
  • Page 407 ® ® ® R&S ZVA / R&S ZVB / R&S GUI Reference Channel Menu reference Z are divided by two (see table below). Switching between the two stimulus power modes changes the single ended power levels by 3 dB. The (Channel –...
  • Page 408 ® ® R&S ZVA / R&S ZVB / R&S GUI Reference Channel Menu very low levels (<–30 dBm) and large IF bandwidths, a message "Port<n> power unleveled" may indicate that the signal-to-noise ratio at one of the ports is too low. Again, the measurement is not aborted, however, the analyzer is no longer capable of providing accurate balanced waves.
  • Page 409 ® ® ® R&S ZVA / R&S ZVB / R&S GUI Reference Channel Menu The reference impedances Z and Z can be entered in the Balanced Ports and Port Groups dialog. CALCulate<Ch>:PARameter:SDEFine 'AS1D2S' | Remote control: S-Parameters in True Differential Mode...
  • Page 410 ® ® R&S ZVA / R&S ZVB / R&S GUI Reference Channel Menu Differences may appear for nonlinear devices at high stimulus power levels. For example, the bias of semiconductor devices like transistors may depend on the kind of stimulus signal. The following figure shows a power sweep measured in virtual differential mode (green) and in true differential mode (blue).
  • Page 411 ® ® R&S ZVA / R&S ZVB / R&S GUI Reference Channel Menu Calibration kits do not contain frequency-converting two-port standards so that any system error correction is performed at equal source and receiver frequencies. However, if a scalar mixer measurement is active, the analyzer automatically performs the system error correction in both the RF and the IF frequency range.
  • Page 412 ® ® ® R&S ZVA / R&S ZVB / R&S GUI Reference Channel Menu analyzer generates both stimulus modes according to what the measurement of the selected quantity requires.  The power levels of the two sources are swept symmetrically around the equilibrium state |a...
  • Page 413 ® ® ® R&S ZVA / R&S ZVB / R&S GUI Reference Channel Menu [SENSe<Ch>:]SWEep:TYPE IAMPlitude Remote control: SOURce<Ch>:TDIF:IMBalance:AMPLitude:LPORt SOURce<Ch>:TDIF:IMBalance:AMPLitude:STARt SOURce<Ch>:TDIF:IMBalance:AMPLitude:STOP CALCulate<Ch>:TDIF:IMBalance:COMPensation[:STATe] Phase Imbalance Sweep The phase imbalance sweep is a special application of the true differential mode. The analyzer generates a balanced signal at one of its logical ports, however, the relative phase of the two signal components is varied according to the selected phase range.
  • Page 414 ® ® ® R&S ZVA / R&S ZVB / R&S GUI Reference Channel Menu Channel – Stimulus – Stop. [SENSe<Ch>:]SWEep:TYPE IPHase Remote control: SOURce<Ch>:TDIF:IMBalance:PHASe:LPORt SOURce<Ch>:TDIF:IMBalance:PHASe:STARt SOURce<Ch>:TDIF:IMBalance:PHASe:STOP CALCulate<Ch>:TDIF:IMBalance:COMPensation[:STATe] Defined Coherence Mode (for R&S ZVA and R&S ZVT) With option R&S ZVA-K6, True Differential Mode, the vector network analyzer can also generate several continuous signals with specific relative amplitude and phase.
  • Page 415 ® ® ® R&S ZVA / R&S ZVB / R&S GUI Reference Channel Menu  Reference Port selects one of the physical analyzer ports as a reference port. The reference port is the source port for the reference signal; its properties are defined in the Port Configuration dialog.
  • Page 416 ® ® ® R&S ZVA / R&S ZVB / R&S GUI Reference Channel Menu Relative phase examples Suppose that Port 1 is the reference port and the coherent signal at Port 3 is defined with a relative phase setting of +90°. In the complex I/Q plane, the Port 3 signal precedes the Port 1 signal by 90°.
  • Page 417 ® ® ® R&S ZVA / R&S ZVB / R&S GUI Reference Channel Menu Relation to trigger settings In triggered measurements, Alternate has no effect if the triggered measurement sequence is identical to a single sweep point. The following table shows how the analyzer performs a sweep comprising m sweep points, assuming that each of them requires n partial measurements.
  • Page 418 ® ® ® R&S ZVA / R&S ZVB / R&S GUI Reference Channel Menu All partial measurements of each sweep point are carried out one after another. Source port specific trigger delays are supported. On R&S ZVA67 analyzers, the alternating sweep mode speeds up all measurements which require several partial measurements.
  • Page 419 ® ® ® R&S ZVA / R&S ZVB / R&S GUI Reference Channel Menu If not specified otherwise, the pulse generator settings are channel-specific. A measurement example for pulse generators and pulsed measurements is reported in the Getting Started guide for the extension unit R&S ZVAX24, to be found on the R&S ZVA/B/T documentation CD- ROM.
  • Page 420 ® ® ® R&S ZVA / R&S ZVB / R&S GUI Reference Channel Menu specification. When a Constant High or Constant Low signal is selected, the pulse type of the sync signal is set to Constant High or Constant Low, too. The previous pulse type of the sync signal is restored when the pulse generator signal is reset to Single Pulse or Pulse Train.
  • Page 421 ® ® R&S ZVA / R&S ZVB / R&S GUI Reference Channel Menu The Define Pulse Train dialog contains a table to edit the individual pulse segments; see below. The buttons below the table extend, shorten, or re-order the segment list.
  • Page 422 ® ® R&S ZVA / R&S ZVB / R&S GUI Reference Channel Menu The sync signal is either a single pulse signal with definite pulse width (Sync Width), following the pulse generator signal by a specified Sync Delay (to Pulse), or a constant signal. Constant signals (Constant High and Constant Low) need no further specification.
  • Page 423 ® ® ® R&S ZVA / R&S ZVB / R&S GUI Reference Channel Menu Chopped pulse profile results are measured as follows: 1. The signal is chopped into k measurement intervals of equal width. The interval width is equal to the time resolution.
  • Page 424 ® ® ® R&S ZVA / R&S ZVB / R&S GUI Reference Channel Menu  Off disables the chopped pulse profile mode. All other settings are left unchanged. In remote control it is possible to skip measurement intervals (and thus accelerate the measurement, at the expense of the number of sweep points) by increasing the Delay Increment parameter.
  • Page 425 ® ® ® R&S ZVA / R&S ZVB / R&S GUI Reference Channel Menu This feature can be used to eliminate known spurious components in the input signal that can distort the measurement, especially in the low frequency range. ...
  • Page 426 ® ® R&S ZVA / R&S ZVB / R&S GUI Reference Channel Menu For a wide bandpass, the spurious response flattens the filter edges. The spurious signal can be eliminated by dividing the sweep range into two segments with different LO settings: ...
  • Page 427 ® ® ® R&S ZVA / R&S ZVB / R&S GUI Reference Channel Menu Option Type Application Generator Port 1 B251 To be used for accurate harmonics measurements. Harmonic Filter R&S Suppresses the fundamental wave in the received signal at port 3 and therefore prevents...
  • Page 428 ® ® ® R&S ZVA / R&S ZVB / R&S GUI Reference Channel Menu  The upper radio buttons loop a module into the signal path.  The lower radio buttons cause the modules to be bypassed.  Pulse Generators... opens a dialog to configure the pulse generator signals controlling the pulse modulators.
  • Page 429 ® ® ® R&S ZVA / R&S ZVB / R&S GUI Reference Channel Menu  Source path for port 1 The source path for port 1 is analogous to the source path for port 3 described above.  Receiver path for port 2 The received signal from the analyzer test port is fed to the MEAS PORT 2 IN connector of the Extension Unit.
  • Page 430 ® ® ® R&S ZVA / R&S ZVB / R&S GUI Reference Channel Menu Pulse Generators Defines the source and the output of the pulse generator signals and assigns pulse generator signals to the pulse modulators of the Extension Unit R&S ZVAX24.
  • Page 431 ® ® R&S ZVA / R&S ZVB / R&S GUI Reference Channel Menu Extension Unit R&S ZVAX-TRM (for R&S ZVA and R&S ZVT) The R&S ZVAX-TRM is a configurable extension unit for the R&S ZVA and R&S ZVT families of vector network analyzers, enabling enhanced measurements with high signal power, pulsed stimuli, two-tone stimuli or a combination thereof.
  • Page 432 ® ® R&S ZVA / R&S ZVB / R&S GUI Reference Channel Menu The block diagram below shows a R&S ZVAX-TRM equipped with all available options. It also illustrates the possible SOURCE, REF and MEAS signal paths, resulting from the available options and the state of the transfer switches related to a particular building block.
  • Page 433 ® ® ® R&S ZVA / R&S ZVB / R&S GUI Reference Channel Menu Path The Path tab allows to set up the channel specific RF path configuration of the extension unit. The picture below shows a R&S ZVAX-TRM equipped with all available options. Modules drawn in black are looped into the signal path, while modules drawn in grey are bypassed.
  • Page 434 ® ® ® R&S ZVA / R&S ZVB / R&S GUI Reference Channel Menu User access to source and Direct access to the source and measurement path on the measurement paths via SOURCE IN/OUT extension unit (RF path i=1,2) and MEAS IN/OUT connectors in the lower...
  • Page 435 ® ® ® R&S ZVA / R&S ZVB / R&S GUI Reference Channel Menu In order to use ALC, in the Define Intermodulation Distortion Meas wizard set Two Tone Output to Ext Dev.  Hot S parameter: Hot S22 is a measurement on 2-port DUTs, typically power amplifiers. At the DUT's "out port"...
  • Page 436 ® ® ® R&S ZVA / R&S ZVB / R&S GUI Reference Channel Menu Pulse Generators tab The Pulse Generators tab allows to set up the pulse generators (same as Channel > Mode > Pulse Generator) and presents the settings of the...
  • Page 437 ® ® ® R&S ZVA / R&S ZVB / R&S GUI Reference Channel Menu [SENSe<Ch>:]TEUNit:PMODulator<Path>:SOURce Remote control: [SENSe<Ch>:]TEUNit:PMODulator<Path>:INVert [SENSe<Ch>:]TEUNit:REAR<No>:SOURce [SENSe<Ch>:]TEUNit:REAR<No>:INVert Trigger tab The Trigger tab mirrors settings from the Channel > Sweep > Trigger submenu, in particular from the Channel > Sweep > Trigger > Pulse Gen Channel >...

  • Page 438: Channel Select

    ® ® ® R&S ZVA / R&S ZVB / R&S GUI Reference Channel Menu Channel Select The Channel Select submenu provides functions to create and delete channels and select a channel as the active channel.  Next Channel selects the next channel as the active channel (disabled if only one channel is defined).
  • Page 439 ® ® ® R&S ZVA / R&S ZVB / R&S GUI Reference Channel Menu channel. Channels with no traces are not indicated in the diagram areas but can be accessed via the Channel Manager. OUTPut<Ch>:UPORt[:VALue] <numeric_value> You can monitor the channel activity using the command and the output signals at pins 8 to 11 of the USER CONTROL connector.
  • Page 440 ® ® R&S ZVA / R&S ZVB / R&S GUI Reference Channel Menu settings (including a possible channel calibration) are identical to the previous channel settings; the trace is created with the trace settings of the former active trace but displayed with another color. The former and the new active trace are superimposed but can be easily separated, e.g.

  • Page 441: Channel - Calibration

    ® ® ® R&S ZVA / R&S ZVB / R&S GUI Reference Channel Menu All existing channels of the current setup are listed in a table; see below. Below the table the Trace Manager provides the following buttons:  Add Channel adds a new channel to the list. The new channel is named Ch<n>, where <n> is the largest of all existing channel numbers plus one.
  • Page 442 ® ® ® R&S ZVA / R&S ZVB / R&S GUI Reference Channel Menu  Start Cal opens a submenu to select a new calibration and start the calibration wizard.  Repeat Previous Cal reopens the wizard to repeat and optimize the previous calibration.
  • Page 443 ® ® ® R&S ZVA / R&S ZVB / R&S GUI Reference Channel Menu The calibration types depend on the number of test ports of the analyzer. For a four-port unit:  Calibration Unit opens the dialog for automatic one-port or multi-port calibration using a calibration unit.
  • Page 444 ® ® ® R&S ZVA / R&S ZVB / R&S GUI Reference Channel Menu One-port calibrations can be performed automatically or manually.  Calibration Unit starts an automatic full one-port calibration. This function is enabled while a Calibration Unit is connected.
  • Page 445 ® ® ® R&S ZVA / R&S ZVB / R&S GUI Reference Channel Menu Two-port calibrations can be performed automatically or manually.  Calibration Unit starts an automatic two-port TOSM calibration. This function is enabled while a Calibration Unit is connected.
  • Page 446 ® ® ® R&S ZVA / R&S ZVB / R&S GUI Reference Channel Menu Calibrations can be performed automatically or manually.  Calibration Unit starts an automatic TOSM calibration at the respective ports. This function is enabled while a Calibration Unit is connected.
  • Page 447 ® ® ® R&S ZVA / R&S ZVB / R&S GUI Reference Channel Menu Select Physical Port Connectors and calibration kits at all calibrated ports. Compile Calibrations: Select a calibration type and the physical ports to be calibrated (skipped for predefined calibrations).
  • Page 448 ® ® ® R&S ZVA / R&S ZVB / R&S GUI Reference Channel Menu submenu. For a user-defined calibration (Start Cal – Other...) all selected in the Start Cal measurement ports of the analyzer are displayed regardless of their port configuration.
  • Page 449 ® ® ® R&S ZVA / R&S ZVB / R&S GUI Reference Channel Menu  If the check box is off, the analyzer prepares the calibration sweep(s) for each individual measured standard ("Preparing Cal Sweep...") and reduces the number of drive ports to the required minimum.
  • Page 450 ® ® ® R&S ZVA / R&S ZVB / R&S GUI Reference Channel Menu The selected calibrations and ports appear in the List of Calibrations. An (N) behind the ports number denotes a node port (see Add Calibration dialog). The list of...
  • Page 451 ® ® ® R&S ZVA / R&S ZVB / R&S GUI Reference Channel Menu  Type contains a drop-down list to select a calibration type.  Calibrate Ports provides a list of all test ports of the analyzer (no external device ports). Ports with –...
  • Page 452 ® ® R&S ZVA / R&S ZVB / R&S GUI Reference Channel Menu Measured Standards displays the list of measured standards compiled in the previous dialogs. With the exception of the Isolation (optional) measurement, all standard measurements are required perform the selected calibration.
  • Page 453 ® ® ® R&S ZVA / R&S ZVB / R&S GUI Reference Channel Menu Calibrations using a match or sliding match If the calibration kit contains a sliding match standard, the Sliding Match appears in the Measured Standards list whenever the selected calibration type requires a Match. A click on the node expands the check boxes for the different positions of the load element.
  • Page 454 ® ® ® R&S ZVA / R&S ZVB / R&S GUI Reference Channel Menu the frequency converter flanges and of the waveguide calibration standards must have the same orientation. TRL extensions: calibration with two Lines, combination with TRM Checking one of the boxes in the list causes the analyzer to stop the measurement in all channels except the active one and measure the standard according to the active channel settings.
  • Page 455 ® ® ® R&S ZVA / R&S ZVB / R&S GUI Reference Channel Menu appropriate, self-explanatory notice boxes. [SENSe<Ch>:]CORRection:COLLect[:ACQuire]:RSAVe Remote control: [SENSe<Ch>:]CORRection:COLLect[:ACQUire]:SELected [SENSe<Ch>:]CORRection:COLLect:DELete ["<cal_name>"] [SENSe<Ch>:]CORRection:STIMulus? TRL Extensions The frequency range for a calibration is restricted due to singularities in the system of equations to be ...
  • Page 456 ® ® ® R&S ZVA / R&S ZVB / R&S GUI Reference Channel Menu Frequency range for waveguide standards For waveguide Line standards with a lower cutoff frequency f , the formulas for the minimum and maximum frequency are modified as follows: –...
  • Page 457 ® ® R&S ZVA / R&S ZVB / R&S GUI Reference Channel Menu A second or third Line in the list does not always mean that you have to measure two or three Line standards. If the calibrated frequency range is small enough, the calibration is valid as soon as the analyzer has acquired correction data for a single Line standard.
  • Page 458 ® ® R&S ZVA / R&S ZVB / R&S GUI Reference Channel Menu from one frequency point to the next. The R&S ZVA automatically establishes an appropriate frequency grid for the Unknown Through calibration sweep, depending on the active sweep type: ...
  • Page 459 ® ® ® R&S ZVA / R&S ZVB / R&S GUI Reference Channel Menu The Unknown Through Characteristics dialog shows the delay time or transmission phase that the analyzer determined during the calibration sweep.  For a non-dispersive standard (Dispersive check box cleared), the Delay Time can be determined unambiguously.
  • Page 460 ® ® R&S ZVA / R&S ZVB / R&S GUI Reference Channel Menu The transformation is entered as a mechanical length, where positive values move the reference plane towards the DUT and negative values towards the connector. If a user-defined (Other...) calibration contains multiple NIST Multiline TRL calibrations, the reference plane transformation can be applied for each NIST Multiline TRL calibration individually.
  • Page 461 ® ® ® R&S ZVA / R&S ZVB / R&S GUI Reference Channel Menu dialog was enabled when the last calibration for the active channel was successfully completed. Additional conditions for repeating a calibration Changing the channel settings can cause incompatibilities between the current instrument state and the previous calibration.
  • Page 462 ® ® ® R&S ZVA / R&S ZVB / R&S GUI Reference Channel Menu calibration is possible.  Source Power Cal... opens the configuration dialog for a source power calibration.  Receiver Power Cal... opens the configuration dialog for a receiver power calibration.
  • Page 463 ® ® ® R&S ZVA / R&S ZVB / R&S GUI Reference Channel Menu Calibration procedure The source power calibration requires an external power meter, to be connected via GPIB bus, USB or LAN interface. Use the USB-to-IEC/IEEE Adapter (option R&S...
  • Page 464 ® ® ® R&S ZVA / R&S ZVB / R&S GUI Reference Channel Menu  For an R&S ZVA110 system with external test sets, Port 1 and Port 2 denote the external diplexer ports. Generators (Gen 1, Gen 2 ...) must be configured explicitly in the System Configuration –...
  • Page 465 ® ® ® R&S ZVA / R&S ZVB / R&S GUI Reference Channel Menu Calibration Sweep Diagram The calibration sweep diagram displays the power measured by the external power meter while a source power calibration is performed.  A trace is displayed for each calibration sweep.
  • Page 466 ® ® ® R&S ZVA / R&S ZVB / R&S GUI Reference Channel Menu The dialog provides the following control elements:  Calibration Source Power Settings shows the calibrated Port(s), the Basis of the power conversion formula, the port power Offset, the source step Attenuator setting, Cal (Power) Offset, and the target power of the source power calibration at the calibration plane (Cal Pwr).
  • Page 467 ® ® ® R&S ZVA / R&S ZVB / R&S GUI Reference Channel Menu converter without electronic attenuator is a typical example for a measurement where the Flatness Cal should be disabled.  Includes – Reference Receiver Cal enables a calibration of the reference receiver of the active source port together with the source power calibration.
  • Page 468 ® ® ® R&S ZVA / R&S ZVB / R&S GUI Reference Channel Menu Power Meter Settings The Power Meter settings in the Source Power Cal dialog (and similar dialogs) are used to select the external power meter that is used to measure the exact source power at the calibration point and to ensure maximum accuracy of the power measurement.
  • Page 469 ® ® ® R&S ZVA / R&S ZVB / R&S GUI Reference Channel Menu The settings appear in two panels:  Frequency Information for Power Meter selects the origin of the frequency information for the power meter. For best accuracy, power meters must know the exact frequency of the measured signal. If the signal path between the source and the power meter contains a frequency-converting device, the frequency at the power meter differs from the frequency of the calibrated source.
  • Page 470 ® ® ® R&S ZVA / R&S ZVB / R&S GUI Reference Channel Menu attenuation. You can also save the displayed list to a power meter correction list file with extension (*.pmcl) and re-load it in later sessions (Save List..., Load List...).
  • Page 471 ® ® ® R&S ZVA / R&S ZVB / R&S GUI Reference Channel Menu SOURce<Ch>:POWer:CORRection:TCOefficient:COUNt? SOURce<Ch>:POWer:CORRection:TCOefficient:DELete[:DUMMy] SOURce<Ch>:POWer:CORRection:TCOefficient:DELete:ALL SOURce<Ch>:POWer:CORRection:TCOefficient:FEED MMEMory:LOAD:CORRection:TCOefficient "<file_name>"[,"parameter"] MMEMory:SAVE:CORRection:TCOefficient "<file_name>" Receiver Power Cal... Opens the configuration dialog for a receiver power calibration. The receiver power calibration data is acquired in a calibration sweep after appropriate selection of the calibrated wave quantity and the source.
  • Page 472 ® ® ® R&S ZVA / R&S ZVB / R&S GUI Reference Channel Menu The Receiver Power Cal dialog provides the following control elements:  Wave Quantity to Calibrate provides two pull-down lists to select one of the transmitted waves a or one of the received waves b for the calibration.
  • Page 473 ® ® ® R&S ZVA / R&S ZVB / R&S GUI Reference Channel Menu [SENSe<Ch>:]CORRection:POWer:AWAVe[:STATe] [SENSe<Ch>:]CORRection:POWer:DATA [SENSe<Ch>:]CORRection:POWer[:STATe] Interpolation and Extrapolation The analyzer can interpolate and extrapolate power correction data so that a source or receiver power calibration can be reused after a change of the frequency sweep range: ...
  • Page 474 ® ® ® R&S ZVA / R&S ZVB / R&S GUI Reference Channel Menu SOURce<Ch>:POWer:CORRection:STATe OFF Remote control: [SENSe<Ch>:]CORRection:POWer:STATe OFF Calibration Manager Opens a dialog to store system error correction and power correction data to the cal pool and to assign stored correction data to channels.
  • Page 475 ® ® ® R&S ZVA / R&S ZVB / R&S GUI Reference Channel Menu Calibration states One of the following calibration states is assigned to each of the channels listed in the Cal State table:  No Calibration No specific channel correction data is available. The factory system error correction is used.
  • Page 476 ® ® ® R&S ZVA / R&S ZVB / R&S GUI Reference Channel Menu MMEMory:LOAD:CORRection:MERGe (merge calibration files) Calibration Kits Opens a dialog to manage the calibration kits in use, add new kits and import or export kits. Calibration kits A calibration kit is a set of physical calibration standards for a particular connector type.
  • Page 477 ® ® ® R&S ZVA / R&S ZVB / R&S GUI Reference Channel Menu  View/ Modify Kit adds or deletes standards in an imported or user-defined calibration kit and/or changes their parameters.  Copy Kit to... creates a copy of the selected kit with a new cal kit name.
  • Page 478 ® ® ® R&S ZVA / R&S ZVB / R&S GUI Reference Channel Menu to calibrate a channel. Calibration kits can be obtained as network analyzer accessories; refer to the data sheet for the relevant ordering information. The name of all parameter sets is equal to the name of the corresponding calibration kit model.
  • Page 479 ® ® ® R&S ZVA / R&S ZVB / R&S GUI Reference Channel Menu notes below). To import a ZVA-specific or ZVR-specific cal kit file (*.ck or *.calkit) you can also use the Windows Explorer and simply double-click the file or drag and drop the file into the NWA application. The imported cal kit file is automatically set active.
  • Page 480 ® ® R&S ZVA / R&S ZVB / R&S GUI Reference Channel Menu Calibration Kit or View / Modify Calibration Kit). The functionality of both dialog versions is the same. If Add Calibration Kit is used for a predefined calibration kit, the View / Modify Standard... button can be used to open the View / Modify Standard in <kit_name>...
  • Page 481 ® ® ® R&S ZVA / R&S ZVB / R&S GUI Reference Channel Menu  Delete Standard removes the selected standard from the list and from the calibration kit.  Optimize Line Freq Ranges is available if the calibration kit contains two or more Line standards with different electrical lengths.
  • Page 482 ® ® R&S ZVA / R&S ZVB / R&S GUI Reference Channel Menu The table shows the imported and user-defined calibration kits with their name, connector type and label (if defined). OK deletes the selected kit. Predefined kits cannot be deleted.
  • Page 483 ® ® ® R&S ZVA / R&S ZVB / R&S GUI Reference Channel Menu assigned to the connector type. [SENSe<Ch>:]CORRection:CONNection Remote control: [SENSe<Ch>:]CORRection:CONNection:DELete Offset Model of <Standard> Defines the wave propagation mode in the lines of the standards associated with the connector type. This...
  • Page 484 ® ® ® R&S ZVA / R&S ZVB / R&S GUI Reference Channel Menu Add or View / Modify Standard Defines, displays or modifies the properties of the calibration standards in a particular calibration kit. This dialog is opened from the Add or View / Modify Calibration Kit dialog (Add Standard...
  • Page 485 ® ® R&S ZVA / R&S ZVB / R&S GUI Reference Channel Menu Assigning a label to standards is optional. However, the label is displayed in many dialogs and can help you identify a standard or distinguish different standards with similar parameters.
  • Page 486 ® ® ® R&S ZVA / R&S ZVB / R&S GUI Reference Channel Menu opened from the Add or View / Modify Standard... dialog (Modify Offset... button). The offset parameters depend on whether or not the circuit model is defined in Agilent Mode (see...
  • Page 487 ® ® R&S ZVA / R&S ZVB / R&S GUI Reference Channel Menu The conversion formula for one-port standards has an additional factor 1/2 on the right-hand side. The reason for this factor is that the Loss in dB accounts for the attenuation along the forward and the reverse path (no matter how often the wave actually propagates through the line), whereas the Offset Loss is proportional to the attenuation of the line.
  • Page 488 ® ® ® R&S ZVA / R&S ZVB / R&S GUI Reference Channel Menu Load parameters are used to describe all types of standards except a Through, a Sliding Match, a Line and an Attenuation.  The Through standard is a through-connection between two ports with minimum loss which is...
  • Page 489 ® ® ® R&S ZVA / R&S ZVB / R&S GUI Reference Channel Menu  Calibration Kit R&S ZV-WR12 is suited for the frequency converter R&S ZVA-Z90E (frequency range: 60 GHz to 90 GHz)  Calibration Kit R&S ZV-WR15 is suited for the frequency converter R&S ZVA-Z75 (frequency range: 50 GHz to 75 GHz) ...
  • Page 490 ® ® ® R&S ZVA / R&S ZVB / R&S GUI Reference Channel Menu Standard Type Technical implementation Reflect Short, contained in the calibration kit Through Direct through connection of the two waveguide flanges Line1 Through connection of the two waveguide flanges with Shim in-between.
  • Page 491 ® ® ® R&S ZVA / R&S ZVB / R&S GUI Reference Channel Menu ZV-WR03 Calibration Kit R&S ZV-WR03 The waveguide calibration kit R&S ZV-WR03 allows to calibrate network analyzers for test setups involving frequency converters, in particular R&S ZVA-Z325.
  • Page 492 ® ® R&S ZVA / R&S ZVB / R&S GUI Reference Channel Menu The characteristic data of the standards are very stable and independent of the individual calibration kit. It is not required to deliver individual data with each kit and load the data into the analyzer. Instead the data are already stored in the network analyzer (software option R&S ZVA-K8 and at least firmware version...
  • Page 493 ® ® ® R&S ZVA / R&S ZVB / R&S GUI Reference Channel Menu The enhanced wave correction is automatically activated when one of the following measurement modes is selected:  True differential mode or defined coherence mode (with option R&S ZVA-K6). Enhanced wave correction is a prerequisite for these modes and cannot be disabled.
  • Page 494 ® ® R&S ZVA / R&S ZVB / R&S GUI Reference Channel Menu An Enhanced Scalar Mixer Measurement is a combination of the scalar mixer measurement with enhanced wave correction at port 1 and port 2. This requires two full one port calibrations (predefined as a Scalar Mixer Meas Cal).
  • Page 495 ® ® ® R&S ZVA / R&S ZVB / R&S GUI Reference Channel Menu correction is not available for Simultaneous Measurement with Frequency Offset. Load Match Correction Activates or deactivates the load match correction for frequency conversion measurements. The softkey is disabled if no frequency conversion mode is active.
  • Page 496 ® ® R&S ZVA / R&S ZVB / R&S GUI Reference Channel Menu conversion where the frequency at the DUT input/output ports differs from the analyzer port frequencies. Example: The signal from the analyzer source port 1 is up-converted to the channel base frequency f the output signal of the DUT is down-converted and measured at port 2.
  • Page 497 ® ® ® R&S ZVA / R&S ZVB / R&S GUI Reference Channel Menu Connecting the Calibration Units to the Network Analyzer The calibration units provide the following connectors:  Calibration units R&S ZV-Z51/.../-Z55, R&S ZN-Z151 or R&S ZN-Z153 ...
  • Page 498 ® ® ® R&S ZVA / R&S ZVB / R&S GUI Reference Channel Menu  It is safe to connect or disconnect the calibration unit while the network analyzer is operating. Never connect or disconnect the unit while data is being transferred between the analyzer and the unit.

  • Page 499: Calibration Procedure

    ® ® ® R&S ZVA / R&S ZVB / R&S GUI Reference Channel Menu  A single full n-port calibration for n calibrated ports.  n full one-port calibrations for n calibrated ports.  n/2 * (n – 1) separate full two-port (TOSM or UOSM) calibrations for n calibrated ports (all possible 2-port combinations).
  • Page 500 ® ® R&S ZVA / R&S ZVB / R&S GUI Reference Channel Menu delay or transmission phase of the Unknown Through standard in the cal unit. If any of the components in your test setup (e.g. narrow-band filters or amplifiers) are not designed for the required frequency range, you may still be able to perform a manual calibration and enter the delay or phase manually.
  • Page 501 ® ® ® R&S ZVA / R&S ZVB / R&S GUI Reference Channel Menu The properties of the selected characterization are displayed in the dialog. A message Not suitable for One-Path-Two-Port and Transmission Normalization Calibrations indicates missing Through data in the characterization. See also Missing Through Data.
  • Page 502 ® ® ® R&S ZVA / R&S ZVB / R&S GUI Reference Channel Menu MMEMory:AKAL:USER:CONVersion The Calibration Settings are reset every time the Calibration Unit dialog is closed. Do not attempt to switch on the display and open the cal unit dialogs from a remote script, otherwise you will lose your settings.
  • Page 503 ® ® ® R&S ZVA / R&S ZVB / R&S GUI Reference Channel Menu  Restore the Default port assignment (matching port numbers of the analyzer and the cal unit). This is important if the automatic detection of the port assignment fails.
  • Page 504 ® ® ® R&S ZVA / R&S ZVB / R&S GUI Reference Channel Menu Calibration Conditions Recommendation ("Default" configuration) type Full n-Port The port assignments must establish a Assign the analyzer port with the lowest port number (e.g. port 1) to port 1 of the calibration unit. Subdivide the remaining n – 1 Calibration connection between all calibrated analyzer ports.
  • Page 505 ® ® ® R&S ZVA / R&S ZVB / R&S GUI Reference Channel Menu The examples for One Path Two Port calibration below are also valid for Full n-Port calibration. Example 3: One Path Two Port calibration The following example shows a valid port assignment for a One Path Two Port calibration of four analyzer ports using a two-port calibration unit.
  • Page 506 ® ® ® R&S ZVA / R&S ZVB / R&S GUI Reference Channel Menu and start the wizard. 4. Step through the wizard, following the instructions in the dialogs. Characterize Cal Unit The Characterize Cal Unit dialog displays the properties of the connected cal units, provides control elements for characterization file management, and starts the characterization wizard.
  • Page 507 ® ® ® R&S ZVA / R&S ZVB / R&S GUI Reference Channel Menu  Disable User Characterization Warnings in the Calibration Unit dialog.  Start the characterization wizard (Start Characterization). If the calibration unit supports SD cards and an SD Card is inserted into the calibration unit's SD card slot,...

  • Page 508: Calibration State Labels

    ® ® ® R&S ZVA / R&S ZVB / R&S GUI Reference Channel Menu The created characterization data set is automatically transferred to the active cal unit; the *.calkit file name appears in the list of available Characterization Data. [SENSe<Ch>:]CORRection:COLLect:AUTO Remote control: [SENSe<Ch>:]CORRection:COLLect:AUTO:PORTs...
  • Page 509 ® ® ® R&S ZVA / R&S ZVB / R&S GUI Reference Channel Menu  PCal denotes an active power calibration with unchanged sweep points (no interpolation or extrapolation).  PCai denotes an active, interpolated power calibration (the calibration data for at least one sweep point is interpolated).

  • Page 510: Channel - Offset

    ® ® ® R&S ZVA / R&S ZVB / R&S GUI Reference Channel Menu Label Meaning measurement. NCal The noise figure calibration is invalid, e.g. because:  The gain and noise measurement method was changed from "Sequential" to "Simultaneous" or vice versa (see Define Noise Figure Measurement dialog).
  • Page 511 ® ® ® R&S ZVA / R&S ZVB / R&S GUI Reference Channel Menu Loss = Loss(f ) = 0 dB. In practice, the frequency-dependent loss often represents the dominant contribution so that Loss can be set to zero. The entries in the One-Way Loss section of the offset dialogs have the following meaning: DC loss...
  • Page 512 ® ® ® R&S ZVA / R&S ZVB / R&S GUI Reference Channel Menu  Offset parameters must be assigned to both physical ports of a logical port.  Auto Length corrects the length offset of both physical ports of a logical port by the same amount.
  • Page 513 ® ® ® R&S ZVA / R&S ZVB / R&S GUI Reference Channel Menu [SENSe<Ch>:]CORRection:EDELay<port_no>:ELENgth Remote control: [SENSe<Ch>:]CORRection:LOSS<port_no> [SENSe<Ch>:]CORRection:LOSS<port_no>:FREQuency [SENSe<Ch>:]CORRection:LOSS<port_no>:OFFSet [SENSe<Ch>:]CORRection:OFFSet<port_no>:DFComp[:STATe]? Mechanical Length Opens a dialog to define length offset parameters for the physical test ports as mechanical lengths and permittivities.
  • Page 514 ® ® ® R&S ZVA / R&S ZVB / R&S GUI Reference Channel Menu Delay Opens a dialog to define the length offset parameters for the physical test ports as delays. The dialog also contains the DC loss, the loss at the reference frequency Loss(f ), and the reference frequency f ;...
  • Page 515 ® ® ® R&S ZVA / R&S ZVB / R&S GUI Reference Channel Menu always provides the single cable length and the delay for a propagation in one direction. The analyzer provides alternative ways for delay measurements: Measure the reflection factor and select Trace – Format – Delay. This yields the delay for propagation in forward and reverse direction and should be approx.
  • Page 516 ® ® ® R&S ZVA / R&S ZVB / R&S GUI Reference Channel Menu Preconditions for Auto Length and Loss, effect on measured quantities and exceptions Auto Length and Loss is enabled if the measured quantity contains the necessary phase information as a function of the frequency, and if the interpretation of the results is unambiguous: ...
  • Page 517 ® ® R&S ZVA / R&S ZVB / R&S GUI Reference Channel Menu length offset and loss correction. For maximum accuracy, it is recommendable to place the reference plane as close as possible towards the outer test fixture connectors using a full n-port calibration. The fixture compensation is then carried out in a second step, it only has to compensate for the effect of the test fixture connections.
  • Page 518 ® ® ® R&S ZVA / R&S ZVB / R&S GUI Reference Channel Menu Refer to section Channel - Offset for details. Direct Compensation provides a frequency-dependent transmission factor. The phase of the transmission factor is calculated from the square root of the measured reflection factor, assuming a reciprocal test fixture.

  • Page 519: Display Menu

    ® ® ® R&S ZVA / R&S ZVB / R&S GUI Reference Display Menu [SENSe<Ch>:]CORRection:COLLect:FIXTure[:ACQuire] [SENSe<Ch>:]CORRection:COLLect:FIXTure:SAVE Display Menu The Display menu provides all display settings and the functions to activate, modify and arrange different diagram areas. Diagram Areas A diagram area is a rectangular portion of the screen used to display traces. Diagram areas are arranged in windows;...
  • Page 520 ® ® ® R&S ZVA / R&S ZVB / R&S GUI Reference Display Menu The analyzer provides several tools to activate a diagram area:  A left mouse click on a point in the diagram activates the diagram including the last active trace in the diagram.
  • Page 521 ® ® ® R&S ZVA / R&S ZVB / R&S GUI Reference Display Menu Next Diag. Area Selects the next diagram area as the active diagram area. This function is disabled if the current setup contains only one diagram area. The order of the diagram areas is given by the diagram numbers displayed in the upper right corner.
  • Page 522 ® ® ® R&S ZVA / R&S ZVB / R&S GUI Reference Display Menu Delete Diag Area Deletes the current diagram area including all traces displayed in the diagram area. Delete Diag Area is disabled if the setup contains only one diagram area: In manual control, each setup must contain at least one diagram area with one channel and one trace.
  • Page 523 ® ® ® R&S ZVA / R&S ZVB / R&S GUI Reference Display Menu To vary the size and position of the diagram areas, drag and drop the separating frames, use the Split Manager or the functions of the Window menu.
  • Page 524 ® ® ® R&S ZVA / R&S ZVB / R&S GUI Reference Display Menu Dual Split Splits the window horizontally into two diagram areas and distributes the traces among the two areas, separating diagrams with different trace Format Channel settings (e.g. Cartesian and polar diagrams).
  • Page 525 ® ® ® R&S ZVA / R&S ZVB / R&S GUI Reference Display Menu Remote control: No command, display configuration only. Quad Split Splits the active window into four diagram areas and distributes the traces among the four areas, separating diagrams with different trace...
  • Page 526 ® ® ® R&S ZVA / R&S ZVB / R&S GUI Reference Display Menu The following examples were obtained with 3 diagram areas, each with 1 trace. Lineup Stack Tile Horizontally Operating Manual 1145.1084.12 – 30...
  • Page 527 ® ® ® R&S ZVA / R&S ZVB / R&S GUI Reference Display Menu Tile Vertically Rows and Columns (2 | 1): the 3rd trace is displayed in overlay mode. Remote control: No command, display configuration only. Title Opens a dialog to opens a dialog to define a title and display it in one of the diagram areas.

  • Page 528: Display Config

    ® ® ® R&S ZVA / R&S ZVB / R&S GUI Reference Display Menu diagram areas and traces: DISPlay:WINDow<Wnd>:NAME '<Name>' DISPlay:WINDow<Wnd>:CATalog? DISPlay:WINDow<Wnd>:TRACe<WndTr>:CATalog? Display Config The Display Config submenu configures the screen by showing or hiding controls and information elements and controls the appearance of the individual diagrams.
  • Page 529 ® ® R&S ZVA / R&S ZVB / R&S GUI Reference Display Menu The softkey bar shows up to 8 commands of the active menu indicated above softkey no. 1. The figure above shows the upper part of the softkey bar corresponding to the Trace – Measure submenu. Pressing the key to the right of a softkey directly activates a submenu, calls up the numeric entry bar or a dialog or initiates an action.
  • Page 530 ® ® ® R&S ZVA / R&S ZVB / R&S GUI Reference Display Menu sweep and the control mode of the analyzer (LOCAL or REMOTE). Color Scheme Controls the colors in the diagram areas. Color schemes are global settings and apply to all active setups.
  • Page 531 ® ® ® R&S ZVA / R&S ZVB / R&S GUI Reference Display Menu The following control elements change the current color scheme:  The screen element to be modified is selected from the Element drop-down list. The list contains the background and all traces, text elements and lines in the diagrams.

  • Page 532: System Menu

    ® ® ® R&S ZVA / R&S ZVB / R&S GUI Reference System Menu double-click the file or drag and drop the file into the NWA application. DISPlay:CMAP<Element>:RGB <red>, <green>, <blue> [,<trace_style>, Remote <trace_width>] control: DISPlay:CMAP<Element>:MARKer[:STATe] ON | OFF DISPlay:CMAP<Element>:TRACe:COLor[:STATe] ON | OFF...

  • Page 533: System Configuration

    ® ® ® R&S ZVA / R&S ZVB / R&S GUI Reference System Menu  GPIB Address opens the numeric entry bar to define the analyzer's GPIB address.  Service Function opens a dialog to access the service functions of the instrument.
  • Page 534 ® ® ® R&S ZVA / R&S ZVB / R&S GUI Reference System Menu  External Generators  Frequency Converter  LXI Configuration  Matrix Configuration The System Configuration comprises global settings that are not affected by a preset of the or *RST).
  • Page 535 ® ® R&S ZVA / R&S ZVB / R&S GUI Reference System Menu frequency information in the dialogs (including the channel list, the marker info fields, and the marker tables). The same password is used to de-activate the password protection. If no password is set, Display –...
  • Page 536 ® ® ® R&S ZVA / R&S ZVB / R&S GUI Reference System Menu The Calibration tab provides the following settings:  Keep Measurement Data for >Repeat Previous Cal< causes the raw measurement data of the standards to be stored after the calibration is completed. This function is equivalent to the...
  • Page 537 ® ® ® R&S ZVA / R&S ZVB / R&S GUI Reference System Menu  No of Sliding Match Positions defines the maximum number of different positions to be measured if a sliding match standard (sliding load) is used for calibration. The different positions appear in Measure Standards dialog of the calibration wizard.
  • Page 538 ® ® ® R&S ZVA / R&S ZVB / R&S GUI Reference System Menu  The Port Power Limits limit the source power at the analyzer ports or at the output ports of previously configured external generators. The limits are also valid for measurements with variable source power.
  • Page 539 ® ® ® R&S ZVA / R&S ZVB / R&S GUI Reference System Menu SOURce<Ch>:POWer<Pt>:GENerator<Gen>:LLIMit[:STATe] SOURce<Ch>:POWer<Pt>:GENerator<Gen>:LLIMit:VALue SOURce<Ch>:TDIF:WAVes SENDed | DCMode OUTPut:STATe:TYPE SOURce<Ch>:POWer<Pt>:REDuce Presets This tab specifies the preset behavior of the network analyzer. The Preset Scope defines whether a Preset should restore default settings for the Active Setup only, or if it should preset the Instrument by closing all open setups and creating a single setup "Set1"...
  • Page 540 ® ® ® R&S ZVA / R&S ZVB / R&S GUI Reference System Menu SYSTem:FPReset commands is always the Active Setup (in the sense defined above). SYSTem:PRESet:SCOPe SINGle | ALL Remote control SYSTem:PRESet:USER:NAME '<Setup_file>' (for Presets): SYSTem:PRESet:USER:[:STATe] SYSTem:PRESet:REMote[:STATe] Channel Bits...
  • Page 541 ® ® ® R&S ZVA / R&S ZVB / R&S GUI Reference System Menu OUTPut<Ch>:UPORt[:VALue] (for Channel Bits): Resets Provides several buttons to reset global instrument settings and properties. Global settings (e.g. the data related to global resources) are not affected by an instrument Preset.
  • Page 542 ® ® ® R&S ZVA / R&S ZVB / R&S GUI Reference System Menu Remote Settings Provides settings for the remote control (RC) interface of the analyzer. The Remote Language for the analyzer is specified in the upper part. ...
  • Page 543 The ID String and the OPT String of the analyzer are adjusted to the selected Remote Language. The strings can be queried via *IDN? and *OPT?, respectively.  If the DEFAULT language is activated, the factory ID string Rohde&Schwarz,ZVB<Max. Freq.- Ports>Port,<Serial_no>,<FW_Version> (e.g. Rohde&Schwarz,ZVB8- 4Port,1145101010100001,1.70.5) is set. The OPT string is a comma-separated list of all installed software and hardware options, e.g.
  • Page 544 ® ® ® R&S ZVA / R&S ZVB / R&S GUI Reference System Menu measure simultaneously. They can also provide accurate results for signals at inaccurate or unknown frequencies. A typical example is a mixer measurement with an unknown LO signal (and therefore unknown IF output frequency).
  • Page 545 ® ® ® R&S ZVA / R&S ZVB / R&S GUI Reference System Menu The External Power Meters dialog provides two tables and some additional buttons.  The upper table (Found:) shows all power meters that the analyzer detects to be on line (i.e.
  • Page 546 ® ® ® R&S ZVA / R&S ZVB / R&S GUI Reference System Menu Icons in the power meter tables The following icons describe the status of a power meter: The power meter is on-line (connected, switched on, ready to be used).
  • Page 547 ® ® ® R&S ZVA / R&S ZVB / R&S GUI Reference System Menu The following control elements select the power meter type and its connection:  Name is an optional, arbitrary name associated with the power meter. Names appear in the power...
  • Page 548 ® ® ® R&S ZVA / R&S ZVB / R&S GUI Reference System Menu  Power calibration: An external generator can provide the reference signal for a source or receiver calibration. A typical example is a receiver power calibration using a measured wave b...
  • Page 549 ® ® ® R&S ZVA / R&S ZVB / R&S GUI Reference System Menu The External Generators dialog provides two tables and some additional buttons.  The upper table (Found:) shows all generators that the analyzer detects to be on-line (i.e.
  • Page 550 ® ® ® R&S ZVA / R&S ZVB / R&S GUI Reference System Menu SYSTem:COMMunicate:RDEVice:GENerator<gen_no>:DEFine Remote control: SYSTem:COMMunicate:RDEVice:GENerator<gen_no>:DELete SYSTem:COMMunicate:RDEVice:GENerator<gen_no>:CATalog? SYSTem:COMMunicate:RDEVice:GENerator<gen_no>:COUNt? Add/Modify External Generator Selects and configures an external generator. The following control elements select the generator type and its connection: ...
  • Page 551 ® ® R&S ZVA / R&S ZVB / R&S GUI Reference System Menu If Fast Sweep is activated, the analyzer compiles a list of the stimulus values (frequencies and power levels) in all channels and transfers it to the generator. The list is automatically updated and re-transferred whenever the channel settings are changed.
  • Page 552 ® ® R&S ZVA / R&S ZVB / R&S GUI Reference System Menu The multiport test set can be configured to provide several channel-specific port groups. The "input" ports (numbered 1 to 4) are connected to the corresponding network analyzer ports. The signal at each "input"...

  • Page 553: System Config

    ® ® ® R&S ZVA / R&S ZVB / R&S GUI Reference System Menu System Config Converter Control (Option R&S ZVA-K8, for R&S ZVA and R&S ZVT) Measurements at frequencies beyond the network analyzer's operating range (mm-wave measurements) are performed with an external test set (frequency converter) that multiplies the source frequency of the analyzer up to the target mm-wave band and uses harmonic mixers to down-convert reference and test receiver signals to an IF below 2 GHz.
  • Page 554 ® ® ® R&S ZVA / R&S ZVB / R&S GUI Reference System Menu Test Setup and Principle of the Measurement The frequency converters use frequency multipliers to transform the RF source signal from one of the network analyzer ports into a high-frequency (mm-wave) stimulus signal. A dual directional coupler separates the reference and measurement channels from the waveguide test port.
  • Page 555 ® ® ® R&S ZVA / R&S ZVB / R&S GUI Reference System Menu divider. See Connecting the Frequency Converters for details. Frequency Converter The Frequency Converter tab belongs to the System Configuration menu (System – System Config). It selects the frequency converter type and the external test setup as well as the Power Control model to be used.
  • Page 556 ® ® R&S ZVA / R&S ZVB / R&S GUI Reference System Menu via USB, named by serial numbers, to the available test ports. Once retrieved from the R&S ZCxxx, the operational data are kept in the NWA for further use, so the converter can be selected at a later time without the need to reconnect it via USB.
  • Page 557 ® ® ® R&S ZVA / R&S ZVB / R&S GUI Reference System Menu Tooltips in the dialog  Insufficient Frequency Range of Analyzer or external Generator. This tooltip is displayed in the following cases: The frequency range of the analyzer is insufficient (e.g. in case of R&S ZVA/T8) For converter setups if an external generator with insufficient frequency range is used as LO signal;...
  • Page 558 ® ® ® R&S ZVA / R&S ZVB / R&S GUI Reference System Menu A click on the ellipsis button in the Power Control column opens the Port<i> Power Control dialog. The power control method must be selected and configured in the following cases: ...
  • Page 559 ® ® ® R&S ZVA / R&S ZVB / R&S GUI Reference System Menu  RF In Power (and Electronic Attenuator) with Data Set is used for converters with or without electronic attenuator, for which leveling data are available (either Factory data, provided via USB or acquired using the R&S Converter Leveling...
  • Page 560 ® ® R&S ZVA / R&S ZVB / R&S GUI Reference System Menu Keep Use default coefficients checked to use a set of default power coefficients, providing acceptable output power control for arbitrary converters. For accurate measurements always use the actual power coefficients of the currently connected converter.
  • Page 561 ® ® R&S ZVA / R&S ZVB / R&S GUI Reference System Menu This power transfer model provides a maximum dynamic range while maintaining the spectral purity of the converter output signal in the low-power range. The output power of converters without electronic attenuator can additionally be set by the power adjustment knob.
  • Page 562 ® ® ® R&S ZVA / R&S ZVB / R&S GUI Reference System Menu In order to set a particular attenuation, e.g. 3 dB, with the mechanical attenuator at port n, proceed as follows: 1. Turn the converter's adjustment knob counter-clockwise until the mechanical stop is reached.
  • Page 563 ® ® ® R&S ZVA / R&S ZVB / R&S GUI Reference System Menu Attention! Input powers RF IN and LO IN The RF input power at the connectors RF IN and LO IN must not exceed the maximum values quoted in the data sheet. The maximum values are below the maximum RF source power of the network analyzer.
  • Page 564 ® ® R&S ZVA / R&S ZVB / R&S GUI Reference System Menu To supply frequency converters of the R&S ZVA-Zxxx series, connect the external DC power supply provided with the converter to the 9 V DC input. To supply frequency converters of the R&S ZCxxx series, connect the converter to the power supply R&S ZCPS by means of the DC cable provided with the...
  • Page 565 ® ® ® R&S ZVA / R&S ZVB / R&S GUI Reference System Menu Always use the DC power supply shipped along with or recommended for your converter. Power and Frequency Settings While the frequency converter mode is active, the Channel – Stimulus settings of the network analyzer control the frequency and power range of the converters.
  • Page 566 ® ® R&S ZVA / R&S ZVB / R&S GUI Reference System Menu where knowledge of the absolute powers of wave quantities a and b is required. Proceed as follows: 1. Ensure that the output power of the frequency converter is not attenuated (adjust the knurled knob at the top of the converter to 2 mm).
  • Page 567 ® ® ® R&S ZVA / R&S ZVB / R&S GUI Reference System Menu To perform the source power calibration, proceed as follows: 1. Ensure that the power control method of the related port is set to Electronic Attenuator only.
  • Page 568 ® ® R&S ZVA / R&S ZVB / R&S GUI Reference System Menu WRyy calibration kit are automatically set active. The R&S ZCxxx converters conform to standard IEEE 1785. The designation of their waveguide sizes is WM-xxxx. The waveguide dimensions are identical to the former WRyy sizes between the 75 –...
  • Page 569 ® ® ® R&S ZVA / R&S ZVB / R&S GUI Reference System Menu Vector Network Analyzer R&S ZVA110 The R&S ZVA-Z110 vector network analyzer supports two essentially different measurement modes:  Measurements with internal test sets cover a frequency range between 10 MHz and approx. 67 GHz.
  • Page 570 ® ® R&S ZVA / R&S ZVB / R&S GUI Reference System Menu frequency stimulus signal. An additional Local Oscillator (LO) signal from PORT 4 of the analyzer is used for down-conversion of the reference and measurement channels. A power divider feeds the LO signal to both the left and the right converter.
  • Page 571 ® ® ® R&S ZVA / R&S ZVB / R&S GUI Reference System Menu See also Frequency Converter in the Converter Control section. Analyzer settings with active ZVA110-BU mode In "ZVA110-BU" mode, the frequency and level settings of the network analyzer are automatically set to be compatible with the external test sets.
  • Page 572 ® ® ® R&S ZVA / R&S ZVB / R&S GUI Reference System Menu Calibration A source power calibration for an external test set requires an appropriate external power meter, to be connected to the converter's 1 mm test port connector. The power meter is configured in the ordinary way using the System Configuration –...
  • Page 573 The following example shows a transmission measurement on a through connection in the frequency range between 10 MHz and 110 GHz. LXI Configuration (R&S ZVA and R&S ZVB Analyzers) LAN eXtensions for Instrumentation (LXI) is an instrumentation platform for measuring instruments and test systems that is based on standard Ethernet technology.
  • Page 574 ® ® ® R&S ZVA / R&S ZVB / R&S GUI Reference System Menu programming by means of IVI drivers.  Class B adds IEEE 1588 Precision Time Protocol (PTP) and peer-to-peer communication to the base class. IEEE 1588 allows all instruments on the same network to automatically synchronize to the most accurate clock available and then provide time stamps or time-based synchronization signals to all instruments with exceptional accuracy.
  • Page 575 ® ® ® R&S ZVA / R&S ZVB / R&S GUI Reference System Menu  LXI Status Enabled switches the LXI logo in the status bar on or off. For instruments running Windows 7, LXI is currently not fully supported and hence this control is disabled.
  • Page 576 ® ® ® R&S ZVA / R&S ZVB / R&S GUI Reference System Menu  The upper table (Found:) shows all receivers that the analyzer detects to be on-line (i.e. connected and switched on) with their properties.  Add copies the selected receiver from the upper table to the lower table.

  • Page 577: Lan Configuration

    ® ® R&S ZVA / R&S ZVB / R&S GUI Reference System Menu The instrument home page displays the device information required by the LXI standard including the VISA resource string in read-only format. The Device Indicator toggle button causes the LXI symbol in the status bar of the analyzer to blink (if active).
  • Page 578 ® ® R&S ZVA / R&S ZVB / R&S GUI Reference System Menu The TCP/IP Mode configuration field controls how the IP address for the instrument gets assigned (see also TCP/IP Configuration). For the manual configuration mode, the static IP address, subnet mask, and default gateway are used to configure the LAN.
  • Page 579 ® ® ® R&S ZVA / R&S ZVB / R&S GUI Reference System Menu The Advanced LAN Configuration parameters are used as follows:  The Negotiation configuration field provides different Ethernet speed and duplex mode settings. In general, the Auto Detect mode is sufficient.
  • Page 580 ® ® ® R&S ZVA / R&S ZVB / R&S GUI Reference System Menu Utilities The pages in the Utilities section are mainly intended for event logging and connection tests.  If logging is enabled, all internal and external LXI events (e.g. the LXI event messages exchanged by two network analyzers which are connected for a mixer delay measurement with external receiver) and all status transitions appear in the Logging Entries table.
  • Page 581 ® ® ® R&S ZVA / R&S ZVB / R&S GUI Reference System Menu  Flush logfile to disk / Clear current logfile writes the logging entries to an xml file on the internal hard disk / clears the file. Use Download current logfile to load the xml contents into the browser and save a copy.

  • Page 582: S-Parameter Wizard

    ® ® ® R&S ZVA / R&S ZVB / R&S GUI Reference System Menu S-Parameter Wizard The S-Parameter Wizard menu consists of a series of dialogs providing the settings for a standard S- parameter measurement in a frequency sweep. The measurement comprises the following stages:...
  • Page 583 ® ® ® R&S ZVA / R&S ZVB / R&S GUI Reference System Menu 1. Select the test setup Choose the single-ended or balanced ports of the analyzer according to the port configuration of your DUT and connect the DUT to the selected analyzer ports. This dialog corresponds to the Predefined Configs tab of the Balanced Ports and Port Groups dialog.

  • Page 584: Int. Reference

    ® ® ® R&S ZVA / R&S ZVB / R&S GUI Reference System Menu Choose a typical measurement bandwidth and one of two typical source power values. A smaller measurement bandwidth increases the dynamic range but slows down the measurement. A smaller source power protects the input port of the analyzer from being overdriven if an active DUT with high gain is measured.

  • Page 585: Gpib Address

    ® ® ® R&S ZVA / R&S ZVB / R&S GUI Reference System Menu external signal. See also example for reference frequency settings for external generators. As a reminder, Ext Ref is indicated in the status bar. [SENSe<Ch>:]ROSCillator[:SOURce] EXTernal Remote control: GPIB Address Opens the numeric entry bar to define the analyzer's GPIB address.

  • Page 586: Undo

    ® ® ® R&S ZVA / R&S ZVB / R&S GUI Reference Info Menu Undo Reverses the last action, if possible. Otherwise, Undo is disabled (grayed). You can use Undo even after a Preset, in order to restore your own instrument settings.

  • Page 587: Window Menu

    ® ® ® R&S ZVA / R&S ZVB / R&S GUI Reference Window Menu provided. The deleted error log shows the message No errors found.  Save System Report... opens a dialog that allows to initiate a selftest and to write the current setup, log files, hardware configuration, a screenshot and the selftest result to a zipped report file.

  • Page 588: Close

    ® ® ® R&S ZVA / R&S ZVB / R&S GUI Reference Window Menu File – File – Open / This command is equivalent to New. To open an existing setup, select Recall. To File – Save rename a setup, use MEMory:DEFine "<setup_name>"...

  • Page 589: Help Menu

    ® ® ® R&S ZVA / R&S ZVB / R&S GUI Reference Help Menu Help Menu The Help menu provides assistance with the network analyzer and its operation. The Help menu contains the following functions:  Help Topics opens this help system.

  • Page 590: Remote Control

    ® ® ® R&S ZVA / R&S ZVB / R&S Remote Control Remote Control: Introduction 6 Remote Control This chapter provides instructions on how to set up the analyzer for remote control, a general introduction to remote control of programmable instruments, and the description of the analyzer's remote control concept.

  • Page 591: Gpib Explorer

    ® ® ® R&S ZVA / R&S ZVB / R&S Remote Control Remote Control: Introduction instrument. In general, program development is further simplified by a graphical program environment. Rohde & Schwarz offers various R&S ZVA driver types (LabView, LabWindows/CVI, IVI, VXIplug&play...) for different programming languages.

  • Page 592: Switchover To Remote Control

    ® ® ® R&S ZVA / R&S ZVB / R&S Remote Control Remote Control: Introduction Refer to the GPIB explorer's help system for more information. It remote logging is enabled (SYSTem:LOGGing:REMote[:STATe] ON) the analyzer stores all received commands to the file 'c:\ZVAB Remote.log'.
  • Page 593 ® ® ® R&S ZVA / R&S ZVB / R&S Remote Control Remote Control: Introduction The softkeys in the remote screen are used to modify or quit the remote state:  Go to Local switches the instrument to local state. This key is locked while a sequential command is executed;...

  • Page 594: Setting The Device Address

    ® ® ® R&S ZVA / R&S ZVB / R&S Remote Control Remote Control: Introduction program script is to be executed repeatedly. See also Viewing calibration sweeps in remote state. The display update is also enabled while a remote control command is executed. Use this feature e.g.

  • Page 595: Combining Manual And Remote Control

    ® ® ® R&S ZVA / R&S ZVB / R&S Remote Control Remote Control: Introduction Combining Manual and Remote Control Using a remote control script is the quickest and easiest way of performing complicated tasks which need to be repeated many times. On the other hand, it is often preferable to control a previously configured measurement manually in order to observe the result on the screen.

  • Page 596: Messages

    ® ® R&S ZVA / R&S ZVB / R&S Remote Control Messages If the menu key requires a numeric entry (e.g. entry of the sweep range: Start, Stop etc.) the command opens the numeric entry bar. The instrument is switched back to remote control mode as soon as the entry has been made manually.

  • Page 597: Scpi Command Structure And Syntax

    ® ® ® R&S ZVA / R&S ZVB / R&S Remote Control Messages consortium. The device messages have a characteristic structure and syntax. In the SCPI reference chapter all commands are listed and explained in detail. SCPI Command Structure and Syntax SCPI commands consist of a so-called header and, in most cases, one or more parameters.
  • Page 598 ® ® ® R&S ZVA / R&S ZVB / R&S Remote Control Messages SENSe This mnemonic identifies the command system SENSe. For commands of lower levels, the complete path has to be specified, starting on the left with the highest level, the individual key words being separated by a colon ":".
  • Page 599 ® ® ® R&S ZVA / R&S ZVB / R&S Remote Control Messages TRIGger:SOURce EXTernal TRIG:SOUR EXT The short form is marked by upper case letters, the long form corresponds to the complete word. Upper case and lower case notation only serves to distinguish the two forms in the manual, the instrument itself is case-insensitive.

  • Page 600: Responses To Queries

    ® ® ® R&S ZVA / R&S ZVB / R&S Remote Control Messages Example: TRIG:SOUR EXT TRIG:THR LOW Responses to Queries A query is defined for each setting command unless explicitly specified otherwise. It is formed by adding a question mark to the associated setting command. According to SCPI, the responses to queries are partly subject to stricter rules than in standard IEEE 488.2.
  • Page 601 ® ® ® R&S ZVA / R&S ZVB / R&S Remote Control Messages model). The following special values can be used:  MIN/MAX MINimum and MAXimum denote the minimum and maximum value of a range of numeric values.  DEF DEFault denotes the preset value. This value is set by the *RST command.

  • Page 602: Basic Remote Control Concepts

    ® ® R&S ZVA / R&S ZVB / R&S Remote Control Basic Remote Control Concepts The hash symbol # introduces the data block. The next number indicates how many of the following digits describe the length of the data block. In the example the 4 following digits indicate the length to be 5168 bytes.

  • Page 603: Traces, Channels, And Diagram Areas

    ® ® ® R&S ZVA / R&S ZVB / R&S Remote Control Basic Remote Control Concepts Traces, Channels, and Diagram Areas Like in manual control, traces can be assigned to a channel and displayed in diagram areas (see section Traces, Channels and Diagram Areas in chapter System Overview).
  • Page 604 ® ® ® R&S ZVA / R&S ZVB / R&S Remote Control Basic Remote Control Concepts The active traces are handled as follows:  After a preset (*RST), the analyzer displays a single diagram area with the default trace no. 1 named TRC1.

  • Page 605: Initiating Measurements, Speed Considerations

    ® ® ® R&S ZVA / R&S ZVB / R&S Remote Control Basic Remote Control Concepts Initiating Measurements, Speed Considerations After a reset the network analyzer measures in continuous mode. The displayed trace shows the result of the last sweep and is continuously updated. This provides a permanent visual control over the measurement and the effect of any analyzer settings.

  • Page 606: Command Processing

    ® ® ® R&S ZVA / R&S ZVB / R&S Remote Control Command Processing Method Commands / Example for the active trace in the channel CALCulate<Ch>:PARameter:DELete '<Trace Name> Trace name (string variable) used as a reference for the trace CONFigure:TRACe<Trc>:NAME? Trace number <Trc>...

  • Page 607: Input Unit

    ® ® ® R&S ZVA / R&S ZVB / R&S Remote Control Command Processing Input Unit The input unit receives commands character by character from the controller and collects them in the input buffer. The input unit sends a message to the command recognition as soon as the input buffer is full or as soon as it receives a delimiter, <PROGRAM MESSAGE TERMINATOR>, as defined in IEEE 488.2, or the...

  • Page 608: Data Base And Instrument Hardware

    ® ® ® R&S ZVA / R&S ZVB / R&S Remote Control Command Processing Data Base and Instrument Hardware The expression "instrument hardware" denotes the part of the instrument fulfilling the actual instrument function – signal generation, measurement etc. The controller is not included. The data base manages all the parameters and associated settings required for the instrument hardware.
  • Page 609 ® ® R&S ZVA / R&S ZVB / R&S Remote Control Command Processing in a defined order, e.g. in order to avoid wrong measurement results, they must be serviced sequentially. This is called synchronization between the controller and the analyzer.

  • Page 610: Status Reporting System

    ® ® ® R&S ZVA / R&S ZVB / R&S Remote Control Status Reporting System Command Action after the hardware has settled Programming the controller *OPC? Stops command processing until 1 is returned, i.e. until the Operation Send *OPC? directly after the command Complete bit has been set in the ESR.

  • Page 611: Structure Of A Scpi Status Register

    ® ® ® R&S ZVA / R&S ZVB / R&S Remote Control Status Reporting System Structure of a SCPI Status Register Each standard SCPI register consists of 5 parts which each have a width of 16 bits and have different functions.
  • Page 612 ® ® R&S ZVA / R&S ZVB / R&S Remote Control Status Reporting System The CONDition part is permanently overwritten by the hardware or the sum bit of the next lower register. Its contents always reflect the current instrument state.

  • Page 613: Contents Of The Status Registers

    ® ® ® R&S ZVA / R&S ZVB / R&S Remote Control Status Reporting System and contain detailed information on the instrument.  IST, PPE The flag ("Individual STatus"), like the SRQ, combines the entire instrument status in a single bit. The is associated to the IST flag.
  • Page 614 ® ® ® R&S ZVA / R&S ZVB / R&S Remote Control Status Reporting System Related common commands The STB is read out using the command *STB? or a serial poll. The SRE can be set using command *SRE and read using *SRE?.
  • Page 615 ® ® ® R&S ZVA / R&S ZVB / R&S Remote Control Status Reporting System Meaning Operation Complete This bit is set on receipt of the command *OPC after all previous commands have been executed. Query Error This bit is set if either the controller wants to read data from the instrument without having sent a query, or if it does not fetch requested data and sends new instructions to the instrument instead.
  • Page 616 ® ® ® R&S ZVA / R&S ZVB / R&S Remote Control Status Reporting System STATus:QUEStionable:LIMit1<1|2> The STATus:QUEStionable:LIMit<1|2> registers indicate the result of the limit check. They can be queried STATus:QUEStionable:LIMit<1|2>:CONDition? using the commands STATus:QUEStionable:LIMit<1|2>[:EVENt]? STATus:QUEStionable:LIMit1 is also the summary register of the lower-level STATus:QUEStionable:LIMit2 register.
  • Page 617 ® ® ® R&S ZVA / R&S ZVB / R&S Remote Control Status Reporting System Refer to the Error Messages section for a detailed description of hardware errors including possible remedies. The bits in the STATus:QUEStionable:INTegrity register are defined as follows:...

  • Page 618: Application Of The Status Reporting System

    ® ® ® R&S ZVA / R&S ZVB / R&S Remote Control Status Reporting System Meaning Problem concerning external power meter This bit is set if an external power meter has been configured but cannot be controlled or provides error messages.
  • Page 619 ® ® ® R&S ZVA / R&S ZVB / R&S Remote Control Status Reporting System Examples:  Use *OPC to generate an SRQ 1. Set bit 0 in the ESE (Operation Complete). 2. Set bit 5 in the SRE (ESB).

  • Page 620: Error Queue

    ® ® ® R&S ZVA / R&S ZVB / R&S Remote Control Status Reporting System The serial poll is mainly used to obtain a fast overview of the state of several instruments connected to the controller. Parallel Poll In a parallel poll, up to eight instruments are simultaneously requested by the controller by means of a single command to transmit 1 bit of information each on the data lines, i.e., to set the data line allocated to...

  • Page 621: Reset Values Of The Status Reporting System

    ® ® ® R&S ZVA / R&S ZVB / R&S Remote Control Status Reporting System detailed plain text error messages that can be looked up in the Error Log or queried via remote control SYSTem:ERRor[:NEXT]? or SYSTem:ERRor:ALL?. Each call of SYSTem:ERRor[:NEXT]? using provides one entry from the error queue.

  • Page 622: Command Reference

    ® ® ® R&S ZVA / R&S ZVB / R&S Command Reference Special Terms and Notation 7 Command Reference This chapter lists all common commands and SCPI commands implemented by the analyzer. Special Terms and Notation This section explains the meaning of special syntax elements used in the SCPI command reference sections.

  • Page 623: Common Commands

    ® ® R&S ZVA / R&S ZVB / R&S Command Reference Common Commands such as division by zero. As defined in the SCPI standard, NAN is represented as 9.91 E 3. INV (invalid) is returned e.g. if a limit check is performed without defining the appropriate tolerance values.
  • Page 624 ® ® ® R&S ZVA / R&S ZVB / R&S Command Reference Common Commands Command Parameters Description Sets the event status enable register to the value indicated. The query *ESE? returns the contents of the event status enable register in decimal form.

  • Page 625: Scpi Command Reference

    ® ® ® R&S ZVA / R&S ZVB / R&S Command Reference SCPI Command Reference SCPI Command Reference ABORt... This subsystem resets the trigger system and places all trigger sequences in the IDLE state. Any actions related to the trigger system that are in progress, such as a sweep or acquiring a measurement, shall also be aborted as quickly as possible.
  • Page 626 ® ® ® R&S ZVA / R&S ZVB / R&S Command Reference SCPI Command Reference where a changed limit line can directly affect the pass/fail result of the displayed trace. <Chn> Channel number used to identify the active trace. This suffix is not relevant because the command provides a summary of all individual limit fails.
  • Page 627 ® ® ® R&S ZVA / R&S ZVB / R&S Command Reference SCPI Command Reference Example 1: *RST; SWE:POIN 20 Create a trace with 20 sweep points, making the created trace the active trace of channel 1 (omitted optional mnemonic SENSe1).
  • Page 628 ® ® ® R&S ZVA / R&S ZVB / R&S Command Reference SCPI Command Reference Error Term Description Receive Ports (S-parameter) SCORr1, ... SCORr12 2-port error terms; see ). 1 and 2 (S11, S12, S21, S22) [SENSe<Ch>:]CORRection:DATA SCORr13 Directivity 3 (S33)
  • Page 629 ® ® R&S ZVA / R&S ZVB / R&S Command Reference SCPI Command Reference system error correction (TOSM, TOM, TRL ...) is active in this channel, the command reads the full nxn S- matrix of the calibrated ports (there is no need to create or display the S-parameter traces). Use CALCulate<Ch>:DATA:CALL:CATalog?
  • Page 630 ® ® ® R&S ZVA / R&S ZVB / R&S Command Reference SCPI Command Reference Types Example: Analogous to CALCulate<Chn>:DATA:ALL?; see CALCulate<Chn>:DATA. CALCulate<Ch>:DATA:SGRoup? FDATa | SDATa | MDATa Reads the current response values of all S-parameters associated to a group of logical ports (S-parameter group).
  • Page 631 ® ® ® R&S ZVA / R&S ZVB / R&S Command Reference SCPI Command Reference <Forward_Count> Number of first sweep to be read. 1 denotes the first sweep acquired, 2 denotes the second and so forth. [SENSe<Ch>:]SWEep:COUNt Range [def. unit] 1 to sweep count defined via [–]...
  • Page 632 ® ® ® R&S ZVA / R&S ZVB / R&S Command Reference SCPI Command Reference Activate single sweep mode and start a single sweep sequence in channel no. 1. Wait until the single sweep sequence is complete. CALC:DATA:NSW? SDAT,3 Query the results of the 8 sweep.
  • Page 633 ® ® ® R&S ZVA / R&S ZVB / R&S Command Reference SCPI Command Reference CALCulate<Chn>:DLINe:STATe <Boolean> Switches the horizontal line on or off. <Chn> Channel number used to identify the active trace. <Boolean> ON | OFF - horizontal line on or off...
  • Page 634 ® ® ® R&S ZVA / R&S ZVB / R&S Command Reference SCPI Command Reference Range [def. unit] 10 dB to 120 dB. The increment (parameters UP or DOWN) is 10 dB. [dB] *RST value 32 dB SCPI, Command Device-specific, command or query...
  • Page 635 ® ® ® R&S ZVA / R&S ZVB / R&S Command Reference SCPI Command Reference CALCulate<Chn>:FILTer[:GATE]:TIME:SPAN <span> Defines the span of the time gate. <Chn> Channel number used to identify the active trace. <span> Span of the time gate. Range [def. unit] 2E-012 s to 200 s.
  • Page 636 ® ® ® R&S ZVA / R&S ZVB / R&S Command Reference SCPI Command Reference Example: *RST; :CALC:TRAN:TIME:STAT?; :CALC:FILT:TIME:STAT? Reset the instrument, activating a frequency sweep, and query whether the default trace is displayed in the time domain and whether the time gate is enabled. The response is 0;0.
  • Page 637 ® ® ® R&S ZVA / R&S ZVB / R&S Command Reference SCPI Command Reference CALCulate<Chn>:FILTer[:GATE]:TIME:WINDow RECT | HAMMing | HANN | BOHMan | DCHebyshev Selects the time gate to be applied to the time domain transform. <Chn> Channel number used to identify the active trace.
  • Page 638 ® ® ® R&S ZVA / R&S ZVB / R&S Command Reference SCPI Command Reference MLINear Calculate the magnitude of z, to be displayed in a Cartesian diagram with a linear scale MLOGarithmic Calculate the magnitude of z, displayed in a Cartesian diagram with a logarithmic scale...
  • Page 639 ® ® ® R&S ZVA / R&S ZVB / R&S Command Reference SCPI Command Reference CALCulate<Chn>:GDAPerture... This subsystem configures the group delay measurement. CALCulate<Chn>:GDAPerture:SCOunt <Steps> Defines an aperture for the calculation of the group delay as an integer number of frequency sweep steps.
  • Page 640 ® ® ® R&S ZVA / R&S ZVB / R&S Command Reference SCPI Command Reference Disable the correction. CALCulate<Chn>:LDEViation:CONStant <Constant> Defines the constant value for the linearity deviation calculation. <Chn> Channel number used to identify the active trace. <Constant> Constant value Range [def.
  • Page 641 ® ® ® R&S ZVA / R&S ZVB / R&S Command Reference SCPI Command Reference CALCulate<Chn>:LDEViation:SLOPe <Slope> Defines the slope of the regression line for the linearity deviation calculation. <Chn> Channel number used to identify the active trace. <Slope> Slope of the regression line Range [def.
  • Page 642 ® ® ® R&S ZVA / R&S ZVB / R&S Command Reference SCPI Command Reference Almost no restriction for limit segments; see Rules for Limit Line Definition. [Hz Range [def. unit] for frequency sweeps, dBm for power sweeps, s for time sweeps] –...
  • Page 643 ® ® ® R&S ZVA / R&S ZVB / R&S Command Reference SCPI Command Reference Define a limit line segment in the stimulus range between –20 dBm and –10 dBm. CALCulate<Chn>:LIMit:CONTrol:SHIFt <numeric_value> Shifts the limit line in horizontal direction. <Chn>...
  • Page 644 ® ® ® R&S ZVA / R&S ZVB / R&S Command Reference SCPI Command Reference Command Types Example: *RST; :CALC:LIM:CONT 1 GHZ, 1.5 GHZ Define an upper limit line segment in the stimulus range between 1 GHz and 1.5 GHz, using default response values.
  • Page 645 ® ® ® R&S ZVA / R&S ZVB / R&S Command Reference SCPI Command Reference Show the limit line segment in the active diagram. CALCulate<Chn>:LIMit:FAIL? Returns a 0 or 1 to indicate whether or not the limit check has failed.
  • Page 646 ® ® ® R&S ZVA / R&S ZVB / R&S Command Reference SCPI Command Reference  For n < k the response values of the lower limit line segments no. 2, 4 to 2*n are updated, the lower limit line segments 2*n+2, 2*n+4,..., 2*k are generated with default stimulus values (see CALCulate<Chn>:LIMit:CONTrol[:DATA].
  • Page 647 ® ® ® R&S ZVA / R&S ZVB / R&S Command Reference SCPI Command Reference Example: CALC:LIM:LOW:FEED 1 GHZ, -10 Use the stimulus values of the active trace, shifted by 1 GHz to the right and decreased by 10 dB, to create a lower limit line.
  • Page 648 ® ® ® R&S ZVA / R&S ZVB / R&S Command Reference SCPI Command Reference CALCulate<Chn>:LIMit:RDOMain:COMPlex S | SINV | Y | Z | YREL | ZREL [Deprecated command, not needed on R&S ZVA] Deletes the existing limit line and (re-)defines the physical units of the response values of the limit line.
  • Page 649 ® ® ® R&S ZVA / R&S ZVB / R&S Command Reference SCPI Command Reference  C selects capacitance units (F/Farad). [–] – *RST value SCPI, Command Device-specific, no query. Types CALCulate<Chn>:LIMit:RDOMain:SPACing LINear | LOGarithmic | dB | SIC [Deprecated command, not needed on R&S ZVA] Deletes the existing limit line and (re-)defines the physical units of the response values of the limit line.
  • Page 650 ® ® ® R&S ZVA / R&S ZVB / R&S Command Reference SCPI Command Reference between 1.5 GHz and 2 GHz, assigning response values of +2 dB and +3 dB. :CALC:LIM:SEGM:AMPL:STAR 5; STOP 5; :CALC:LIM:SEGM:TYPE LMIN Change the segment to a lower limit line segment with a constant response value of +5 dB.
  • Page 651 ® ® ® R&S ZVA / R&S ZVB / R&S Command Reference SCPI Command Reference 1.5 GHz and 2 GHz, assigning response values of +2 dB and +3 dB. CALC:LIM:SEGM:COUNT? Query the number of segments. The response is 1. CALCulate<Chn>:LIMit:SEGMent<Seg>:STIMulus:STARt <numeric_value>...
  • Page 652 ® ® ® R&S ZVA / R&S ZVB / R&S Command Reference SCPI Command Reference <Chn> Channel number used to identify the active trace. <Seg> Segment number <numeric_value> Frequency, power or time value, to be defined in accordance with the domain setting (CALCulate<Chn>:LIMit:CONTrol:DOMain).
  • Page 653 ® ® ® R&S ZVA / R&S ZVB / R&S Command Reference SCPI Command Reference <Chn> Channel number used to identify the active trace. <Boolean> ON | OFF - Fail beep on or off. *RST value SCPI, Command Types Confirmed, command or query.
  • Page 654 ® ® ® R&S ZVA / R&S ZVB / R&S Command Reference SCPI Command Reference CALC:LIM:STAT ON; TTL2 ON Switch the limit check on and activate the TTL out pass 2 signal. CALCulate<Chn>:LIMit:UPPer[:DATA] <numeric_value>,<numeric_value>{,<numeric_value>,<numeric_value>} Defines the response (y-axis) values of the upper limit line and/or creates new limit line segments.
  • Page 655 ® ® ® R&S ZVA / R&S ZVB / R&S Command Reference SCPI Command Reference CALCulate<Chn>:LIMit:UPPer:FEED Generates an upper limit line using the stimulus values of a data or memory trace and specified offset values. <Chn> Channel number used to identify the active trace. This trace provides the stimulus data for the limit line unless another trace <trace_name>...
  • Page 656 ® ® ® R&S ZVA / R&S ZVB / R&S Command Reference SCPI Command Reference CALCulate<Chn>:LIMit:UPPer:STATe <Boolean> Switches the upper limit check on or off. Upper limit line segments are assigned odd numbers; see CALCulate<Chn>:LIMit:UPPer[:DATA]. The command does not affect segments with even numbers.
  • Page 657 ® ® ® R&S ZVA / R&S ZVB / R&S Command Reference SCPI Command Reference Create markers 1 and 2 and assign them to the trace no. 1. CALC:MARK:AOFF Remove both markers. CALCulate<Chn>:MARKer<Mk>:BWIDth <x_dB_Bandwidth> Sets the bandfilter level for a bandfilter search or returns the results. The command is only available after a bandfilter search has been executed (CALCulate<Chn>:MARKer<Mk>:FUNCtion:EXECute...
  • Page 658 ® ® ® R&S ZVA / R&S ZVB / R&S Command Reference SCPI Command Reference center of the bandstop region. CALC:MARK:FUNC:EXEC BFIL Initiate the bandpass filter search for the current trace. Create markers 1 to 4. CALC:MARK:SEAR:BFIL:RES ON Display the marker info field in the diaram area.
  • Page 659 ® ® ® R&S ZVA / R&S ZVB / R&S Command Reference SCPI Command Reference <Mk> Marker number in the range 1 to 10. <Boolean> ON | OFF - Enables or disables the delta mode. *RST value SCPI, Command Device-specific, command or query.
  • Page 660 ® ® ® R&S ZVA / R&S ZVB / R&S Command Reference SCPI Command Reference GDELay Group Delay, – d  (z)/dΩ REAL IMAGinary Standing Wave Ratio, SWR = (1 + |z|) / (1 – |z|) LINPhase Lin Mag and Phase, |z|, arctan ( Im(z) / Re(z) )
  • Page 661 ® ® ® R&S ZVA / R&S ZVB / R&S Command Reference SCPI Command Reference SCPI, Device-specific, command or query. Command Types Example: See CALCulate<Chn>:MARKer<Mk>:BWIDth. CALCulate<Chn>:MARKer<Mk>:FUNCtion:BWIDth:MODE BPASs | BSTop | BPRMarker | BSRMarker | BPABsolute | BSABsolute Selects the bandfilter search mode.
  • Page 662 ® ® ® R&S ZVA / R&S ZVB / R&S Command Reference SCPI Command Reference CALCulate<Chn>:MARKer<Mk>:FUNCtion:DELTa:STATe <Boolean> [Deprecated command] Switches the delta mode for marker <Mk> on trace no. <Chn> on or off. Note: This command is the ZVR-compatible equivalent of CALCulate<Chn>:MARKer<Mk>:DELTa[:STATe].
  • Page 663 ® ® ® R&S ZVA / R&S ZVB / R&S Command Reference SCPI Command Reference SCPI, Command Types Device-specific, command or query. Example: CALCulate<Chn>:STATistics:DOMain:USER CALCulate<Chn>:MARKer<Mk>:FUNCtion:DOMain:USER:STARt <start_value> Defines the start value of the search range selected via CALCulate<Chn>:MARKer<Mk>:FUNCtion:DOMain:USER <numeric_value>. <Chn> Channel number used to identify the active trace <Mk>...
  • Page 664 ® ® ® R&S ZVA / R&S ZVB / R&S Command Reference SCPI Command Reference Parameters See list of parameters below. – *RST value SCPI, Device-specific, no query. Command Types Example: Suppose that the active setup contains an active trace no. 1.
  • Page 665 ® ® ® R&S ZVA / R&S ZVB / R&S Command Reference SCPI Command Reference <Lower Band Edge Response>, <Extreme Stimulus>, <Extreme Response>, <Upper Band Edge Stimulus>, <Upper Band Edge Response> For all other search modes the marker number identifies a particular marker of the active trace and the query returns the value pair <stimulus>, <response>.
  • Page 666 ® ® ® R&S ZVA / R&S ZVB / R&S Command Reference SCPI Command Reference TARGet Target value (see CALCulate<Chn>:MARKer<Mk>:TARget) RTARget Next target value to the right of the current marker position LTARget Next target value to the left BFILter Bandfilter search.
  • Page 667 ® ® ® R&S ZVA / R&S ZVB / R&S Command Reference SCPI Command Reference CALCulate<Chn>:MARKer<Mk>:FUNCtion:TARGet <search_value> [Deprecated command] Defines the target value for the target search of marker no. <Mk>, which can be activated using CALCulate<Chn>:MARKer<Mk>:FUCTion:EXECute TARGet. Note: This command is the ZVR-compatible equivalent of CALCulate<Chn>:MARKer<Mk>:TARget.
  • Page 668 ® ® ® R&S ZVA / R&S ZVB / R&S Command Reference SCPI Command Reference CALCulate<Chn>:MARKer<Mk>:MODE CONTinuous | DISCrete Sets marker no. <Mk> to continuous or discrete mode. The marker doesn't have to be created before ON), the mode can be assigned in advance.
  • Page 669 ® ® ® R&S ZVA / R&S ZVB / R&S Command Reference SCPI Command Reference <Chn> Channel number used to identify the active trace <Mk> Marker number in the range 1 to 10. This numeric suffix is ignored and may be set to any value.
  • Page 670 ® ® ® R&S ZVA / R&S ZVB / R&S Command Reference SCPI Command Reference SCPI, Command Device-specific, command or query Types Example: Suppose that the active setup contains an active trace no. 1. CALC:MARK:REF ON; :CALC:MARK ON Create the reference marker and marker 1 and assign them to trace no. 1. The default position of both markers is the center of the sweep range.
  • Page 671 ® ® ® R&S ZVA / R&S ZVB / R&S Command Reference SCPI Command Reference range for a frequency sweep starts at 1 GHz. CALC:MARK:REF ON Create the reference marker and display it in the center of the sweep range.
  • Page 672 ® ® ® R&S ZVA / R&S ZVB / R&S Command Reference SCPI Command Reference Example: See CALCulate<Chn>:MARKer<Mk>:BWIDth. CALCulate<Chn>:MARKer<Mk>:SEARch[:IMMediate] [Deprecated command] Initiates a search according to the search function selected with CALCulate<Chn>:MARKer<Mk>:FUNCtion[:SELect]. The marker must be created before using CALCulate<Chn>:MARKer<Mk>[:STATe] CALCulate<Chn>:MARKer<Mk>:FUNCtion[:SELect]...
  • Page 673 ® ® ® R&S ZVA / R&S ZVB / R&S Command Reference SCPI Command Reference CALCulate<Chn>:MARKer<Mk>:FUNCtion:EXECute NPEak. <Chn> Channel number used to identify the active trace <Mk> Marker number in the range 1 to 10 – [–] Range [def. unit] –...
  • Page 674 ® ® ® R&S ZVA / R&S ZVB / R&S Command Reference SCPI Command Reference for marker no. 1. CALC:MARK:SEAR:TRAC ON Enable the tracking mode for the created marker. CALCulate<Chn>:MARKer<Mk>[:STATe] <Boolean> Creates the marker numbered <Mk> and assigns it to trace no. <Chn>.
  • Page 675 ® ® ® R&S ZVA / R&S ZVB / R&S Command Reference SCPI Command Reference CALCulate<Chn>:MARKer<Mk>:TYPE NORMal | FIXed Sets marker no. <Mk> to normal or fixed mode. The marker must be created before using CALCulate<Chn>:MARKer<Mk>[:STATe] <Chn> Channel number used to identify the active trace <Mk>...
  • Page 676 ® ® ® R&S ZVA / R&S ZVB / R&S Command Reference SCPI Command Reference <Chn> Channel number used to identify the active trace <Mk> Marker number in the range 1 to 10 Response Response value of marker no. <Mk>...
  • Page 677 ® ® ® R&S ZVA / R&S ZVB / R&S Command Reference SCPI Command Reference Define a mathematical trace, dividing the data trace by the stored memory trace. The mathematical trace is not displayed CALC:MATH:STAT ON Display the mathematical trace instead of the active data trace.
  • Page 678 ® ® ® R&S ZVA / R&S ZVB / R&S Command Reference SCPI Command Reference Type Complete List Description Brackets Priority of operations in complex expressions CALCulate<Chn>:MATH:FUNCtion NORMal | ADD | SUBTract | MULTiply | DIVide Defines a simple mathematical relation between the active trace and the active memory trace to calculate a new mathematical trace and displays the mathematical trace.
  • Page 679 ® ® ® R&S ZVA / R&S ZVB / R&S Command Reference SCPI Command Reference TRACe:COPY:MATH <memory_trc>,<data_trc> <Chn> Channel number used to identify the active trace. – *RST value SCPI, Command Device-specific, no query Types Example: *RST; :CALC:MATH:MEM Copy the current state of the default trace Trc1 to a memory trace named 'Mem2[Trc1]'.
  • Page 680 ® ® ® R&S ZVA / R&S ZVB / R&S Command Reference SCPI Command Reference OFF - Result is Wave Quantity disabled; the analyzer assumes that the result of the mathematical expression is dimensionless. *RST value SCPI, Device-specific, command or query.
  • Page 681 ® ® ® R&S ZVA / R&S ZVB / R&S Command Reference SCPI Command Reference CALC4:PAR:CAT? Query the traces assigned to channel 4. If Ch4Tr1 is the only trace assigned to channel 4, the response is 'CH4TR1,S11'. CALCulate<Ch>:PARameter:DEFine '<string>', S11 | ... | S44 | A | B | C | D | R1 | R2 | R3 | R4 | AB | AC | AD | BA | BC | BD | CA | CB | CD | DA | DB | DC | AR1 | ...
  • Page 682 ® ® ® R&S ZVA / R&S ZVB / R&S Command Reference SCPI Command Reference S11 | S12 | S13 | S14 | S21 | S22 | S23 | S24 | S31 S-parameters | S32 | S33 | S34 | S41 | S42 | S43 | S44...
  • Page 683 ® ® ® R&S ZVA / R&S ZVB / R&S Command Reference SCPI Command Reference <Ch_name>_SG_S<log_port<n>><log_port2>... <Ch_name>_SG_S<log_port<n>><log_port<n>>, e.g. Ch1_SG_S11, Ch1_SG_S12, Ch1_SG_S21, Ch1_SG_S22 for <Ch_name> = Ch1, <log_port1> = 1, <log_port2> = 2. The trace names are displayed in the Trace Manager...
  • Page 684 ® ® ® R&S ZVA / R&S ZVB / R&S Command Reference SCPI Command Reference Example: CALCulate4:PARameter:SDEFine 'Ch4Tr1', 'S11' Create channel 4 and a trace named Ch4Tr1 to measure the input reflection coefficient S CALCulate4:PARameter:CATalog? Query the traces assigned to channel 4. If Ch4Tr1 is the only trace assigned to channel 4, the response is 'CH4TR1,S11'.
  • Page 685 ® ® ® R&S ZVA / R&S ZVB / R&S Command Reference SCPI Command Reference <Ch> Channel number. <Ch> may be used to reference a previously defined channel. If <Ch> does not exist, it is generated with default channel settings.
  • Page 686 ® ® ® R&S ZVA / R&S ZVB / R&S Command Reference SCPI Command Reference CALCulate<Ch>:PARameter:NFIGure:CSETtings '<trace>' Overwrites the current channel settings with the ones that were used during the active (previously performed) noise figure calibration. The referenced trace must show the noise figure of a device.
  • Page 687 ® ® ® R&S ZVA / R&S ZVB / R&S Command Reference SCPI Command Reference '<Trc_name>' Command queries the measured quantity of the trace. Types CALCulate<Ch>:PARameter:CATalog? returns a list of all defined traces. Example: CALC4:PAR:SDEF 'Ch4Tr1', 'S11' Create channel 4 and a trace named Ch4Tr1 to measure the input reflection coefficient S11.
  • Page 688 ® ® ® R&S ZVA / R&S ZVB / R&S Command Reference SCPI Command Reference 'AP1G2' | ... | 'AP01G02' | ... | Primed wave quantities, e.g. for mixer delay measurements, with port numbers and 'BP1G2' | ... | 'BP01G02' | ... | external generator providing the stimulus signal (G<no>...
  • Page 689 ® ® ® R&S ZVA / R&S ZVB / R&S Command Reference SCPI Command Reference 'KFAC21' | 'KFAC12' | ... Stability factor K (for unbalanced ports only) 'MUF121' | 'MUF112' | ... Stability factor μ (for unbalanced ports only) 'MUF221' | 'MUF212' | ...
  • Page 690 ® ® ® R&S ZVA / R&S ZVB / R&S Command Reference SCPI Command Reference SCPI, Command Device-specific, with query (returns the name of the active trace). Types Example: CALC4:PAR:SDEF 'Ch4Tr1', 'S11' Create channel 4 and a trace named Ch4Tr1 to measure the input reflection coefficient S11.
  • Page 691 ® ® ® R&S ZVA / R&S ZVB / R&S Command Reference SCPI Command Reference TLOG | PLIN | PLOG | PSINgle Deletes the existing ripple limit ranges and (re-)defines the physical units of the stimulus values of the CALCulate<Chn>:RIPPle:RDOMain:FORMat ripple limit lines.
  • Page 692 ® ® ® R&S ZVA / R&S ZVB / R&S Command Reference SCPI Command Reference <limit> (CALCulate<Chn>:FORMat). Range [def. Almost no restriction for ripple limit ranges; see Rules for Ripple Limit Definition. unit] [Hz for frequency sweeps, dBm for power sweeps, s for time sweeps, see CALCulate<Chn>:RIPPle:CONTrol:DOMain]...
  • Page 693 ® ® ® R&S ZVA / R&S ZVB / R&S Command Reference SCPI Command Reference Define and enable a ripple limit range in the stimulus range between 1.5 GHz and 2 GHz, assigning a ripple limit of +3 dB. CALC:RIPP:DISP ON Show the ripple limit range in the active diagram.
  • Page 694 ® ® ® R&S ZVA / R&S ZVB / R&S Command Reference SCPI Command Reference  PHASe selects phase units (deg).  GDELay selects time units (s).  L selects inductance units (H/Henry).  C selects capacitance units (F/Farad). [–] –...
  • Page 695 ® ® ® R&S ZVA / R&S ZVB / R&S Command Reference SCPI Command Reference <limit_value> Limit value, to be defined in accordance with the selected format (CALCulate<Chn>:RIPPle:RDOMain:FORMat). Range [def. unit] Almost no restriction for limit ranges; see Rules for Ripple Limit Definition.
  • Page 696 ® ® ® R&S ZVA / R&S ZVB / R&S Command Reference SCPI Command Reference CALCulate<Chn>:RIPPle:SEGMent<Seg>:STIMulus:STARt <start_value> Changes the start stimulus value (i.e. the smallest stimulus value) of a ripple limit range. A range must be created first to enable this command (e.g CALCulate<Chn>:RIPPle:DATA).
  • Page 697 ® ® ® R&S ZVA / R&S ZVB / R&S Command Reference SCPI Command Reference To define several ripple limit ranges with a single command, use CALCulate<Chn>:RIPPle:DATA. <Chn> Channel number used to identify the active trace. <Seg> Segment number <stop_value>...
  • Page 698 ® ® ® R&S ZVA / R&S ZVB / R&S Command Reference SCPI Command Reference CALCulate<Chn>:SMOothing... This subsystem provides the settings for trace smoothing. CALCulate<Chn>:SMOothing:APERture <numeric_value> Defines how many measurement points are averaged to smooth the trace. <Chn> Channel number used to identify the active trace. If unspecified the numeric suffix is set to 1.
  • Page 699 ® ® ® R&S ZVA / R&S ZVB / R&S Command Reference SCPI Command Reference CALCulate<Chn>:STATistics:DOMain:USER:SHOW, CALCulate<Chn>:STATistics:DOMain:USER:STARt CALCulate<Chn>:STATistics:DOMain:USER:STOP commands. <Chn> Channel number used to identify the active trace. If unspecified the numeric suffix is set to 1. <range_no> Number of the evaluation range.
  • Page 700 ® ® ® R&S ZVA / R&S ZVB / R&S Command Reference SCPI Command Reference CALCulate<Chn>:STATistics:DOMain:USER:STOP <stop_value> Defines the stop value of the evaluation range selected via CALCulate<Chn>:STATistics:DOMain:USER. <Chn> Channel number used to identify the active trace. <stop_value> Stop value of the evaluation range.
  • Page 701 ® ® ® R&S ZVA / R&S ZVB / R&S Command Reference SCPI Command Reference SCPI, Command Types Device-specific, command or query. Example: CALCulate<Chn>:STATistics:[:STATe] CALCulate<Chn>:STATistics:NLINear:COMP:LEVel <compression_value> Defines the compression value x for the x-dB compression point measurement (enabled via CALCulate<Chn>:STATistics:MSTDdev[:STATe] ON).
  • Page 702 ® ® ® R&S ZVA / R&S ZVB / R&S Command Reference SCPI Command Reference CALC:STAT:NLIN:COMP:LEV 2 Define a compression value of 2 dB. CALC:STAT:NLIN:COMP ON Enable the enhanced compression point calculation (and display the compression point result in the diagram area).
  • Page 703 ® ® ® R&S ZVA / R&S ZVB / R&S Command Reference SCPI Command Reference CALCulate<Ch>:PARameter:SDEFine but also depends on the trace format (linear or logarithmic scale, see CALCulate<Chn>:FORMat). If a polar trace format is selected, then the statistical parameters are calculated from the linear magnitude of the measurement parameter.
  • Page 704 ® ® ® R&S ZVA / R&S ZVB / R&S Command Reference SCPI Command Reference You can display or hide the Min/Max/Peak-Peak, Mean/Std Dev, RMS, Phase Delay/El Length and Gain/Slope/Flatness results separately; see example below. <Chn> Channel number used to identify the active trace.
  • Page 705 ® ® ® R&S ZVA / R&S ZVB / R&S Command Reference SCPI Command Reference CALCulate<Chn>:TRANsform... This subsystem converts measured data from one representation to another and controls the transformation into the time domain (with option ZVAB-K2, Time Domain). CALCulate<Chn>:TRANsform:COMPlex S | Y | Z...
  • Page 706 ® ® ® R&S ZVA / R&S ZVB / R&S Command Reference SCPI Command Reference SCPI, Command Types Device-specific, command or query. Example: [SENSe<Ch>:]PORt<phys_port>:ZREFerence CALCulate<Chn>:TRANsform:TIME:CENTer <numeric_value> Defines the center time of the diagram in time domain. <Chn> Channel number used to identify the active trace <numeric_value>...
  • Page 707 ® ® ® R&S ZVA / R&S ZVB / R&S Command Reference SCPI Command Reference KSDfrequency Calculates the harmonic grid for lowpass time domain transforms according to one of the three alternative algorithms. <Chn> Channel number used to identify the active trace KFSTop –...
  • Page 708 ® ® ® R&S ZVA / R&S ZVB / R&S Command Reference SCPI Command Reference Select a resolution enhancement factor of 3 in order to improve the resolution in time domain. CALCulate<Chn>:TRANsform:TIME:LPASs:DCSParam:CONTinuous <Boolean> Determines whether continuous extrapolation for the DC value is enabled.
  • Page 709 ® ® ® R&S ZVA / R&S ZVB / R&S Command Reference SCPI Command Reference CALCulate<Chn>:TRANsform:TIME:RESolution:EFACtor <factor> Defines the resolution enhancement factor for the time domain transform. <Chn> Channel number used to identify the active trace <factor> Resolution enhancement factor.
  • Page 710 ® ® ® R&S ZVA / R&S ZVB / R&S Command Reference SCPI Command Reference Note: If the start frequency entered is greater than the current stop frequency (CALCulate<Chn>:TRANsform:TIME:STOP), the stop frequency is set to the start frequency plus the minimum frequency span (CALCulate<Chn>:TRANsform:TIME:SPAN).
  • Page 711 ® ® ® R&S ZVA / R&S ZVB / R&S Command Reference SCPI Command Reference SCPI, Command Confirmed, command or query Types Example: See CALCulate<Chn>:TRANsform:TIME:STARt. Note: If the stop frequency entered is smaller than the current start frequency (CALCulate<Chn>:TRANsform:TIME:STARt), the start frequency is set to the stop frequency minus the minimum frequency span (CALCulate<Chn>:TRANsform:TIME:SPAN).
  • Page 712 ® ® ® R&S ZVA / R&S ZVB / R&S Command Reference SCPI Command Reference SCPI, Command Types Confirmed (with some device-specific parameters), command or query Example: CALCulate<Chn>:TRANsform:TIME:DCHebychev CALCulate<Chn>:TRANsform:TIME:XAXis TIME | DISTance Switches over between the x-axis scaling in time units or distance units.
  • Page 713 ® ® ® R&S ZVA / R&S ZVB / R&S Command Reference SCPI Command Reference Parameter Circuit model Capacitances Resistances Inductances SLCS Shunt L, serial Cs C1, C2 R1, R2, R3 SCLS Shunt C, serial Ls R1, R2, R3 L1, L2 –...
  • Page 714 ® ® ® R&S ZVA / R&S ZVB / R&S Command Reference SCPI Command Reference <numeric_value> Capacitance C<no> for the specified circuit model. –15 –1mF to 1 mF [F]. The increment is 1 fF (10 Range [def. unit] –12 *RST value...
  • Page 715 ® ® ® R&S ZVA / R&S ZVB / R&S Command Reference SCPI Command Reference CALCulate<Ch>:TRANsform:VNETworks:BALanced:DEEMbedding<Log_pt>:PAR ameters:R<no> STSL | STSC | SLST | SCST | CSSL | LSSC | CSSC | LSSL | SLCS | SCLS | SCCS | SLLS,<numeric_value>...
  • Page 716 ® ® ® R&S ZVA / R&S ZVB / R&S Command Reference SCPI Command Reference Select the Serial Cs, shunt L circuit model for deembedding. CALC:TRAN:VNET:BAL:DEEM:PAR:R3 CSSL, 2.2E+3; :CALC:TRAN:VNET:BAL:DEEM ON Increase the resistance R3 for the Serial Cs, shunt L circuit model to 2.2 kΩ...
  • Page 717 ® ® ® R&S ZVA / R&S ZVB / R&S Command Reference SCPI Command Reference CALC:TRAN:VNET:BAL:EMB:PAR:C2 CSSL, 2.2E-12 Increase the capacitance to 2.2 pF. CALCulate<Ch>:TRANsform:VNETworks:BALanced:EMBedding<Log_pt>:PARam eters:L<no> STSL | SLST | CSSL | LSSC | LSSL | SLCS | SCLS | SLLS,<numeric_value>...
  • Page 718 ® ® ® R&S ZVA / R&S ZVB / R&S Command Reference SCPI Command Reference <numeric_value> Resistance R<no> for the specified circuit model. –3 –10 MΩ to 10 MΩ [Ω]. The increment is 1 mΩ (10 Ω). Range [def. unit] 0 Ω...
  • Page 719 ® ® ® R&S ZVA / R&S ZVB / R&S Command Reference SCPI Command Reference <Ch> Channel number <Log_pt> Logical port number (balanced port) Parameters Possible circuit models (character data); see circuit models. *RST value CSSL SCPI, Command Types Device-specific, command or query.
  • Page 720 ® ® ® R&S ZVA / R&S ZVB / R&S Command Reference SCPI Command Reference CALC:TRAN:VNET:GLO:DEEM:PAR:L SL, 2.2E-9 Increase the inductance to 2.2 nH. CALCulate<Ch>:TRANsform:VNETworks:GLOop:DEEMbedding:PARameters:R SC | SL, <resistance> Specifies the resistance value R in the different circuit models for ground loop deembedding.
  • Page 721 ® ® ® R&S ZVA / R&S ZVB / R&S Command Reference SCPI Command Reference CALCulate<Ch>:TRANsform:VNETworks:GLOop:DEEMbedding:TNDefinition FIMPort | SL | SC Selects the circuit model for ground loop deembedding. <Ch> Channel number. Parameters Possible circuit models (character data); see circuit models.
  • Page 722 ® ® ® R&S ZVA / R&S ZVB / R&S Command Reference SCPI Command Reference Example: *RST; :CALC:TRAN:VNET:GLO:EMB:PAR:L? SL Query the default inductance for ground loop embedding. The response is 1E- 009 (1 nH). CALC:TRAN:VNET:GLO:EMB:PAR:L SL, 2.2E-9 Increase the inductance to 2.2 nH.
  • Page 723 ® ® ® R&S ZVA / R&S ZVB / R&S Command Reference SCPI Command Reference embedding. CALCulate<Ch>:TRANsform:VNETworks:GLOop:EMBedding:TNDefinition FIMPort | SL | SC Selects the circuit model for ground loop embedding. <Ch> Channel number. Parameters Possible circuit models (character data); see circuit models.
  • Page 724 ® ® ® R&S ZVA / R&S ZVB / R&S Command Reference SCPI Command Reference – *RST value SCPI, Device-specific, no query Command Types Example: CALCulate<Ch>:TRANsform:VNETworks:PPAir:DEEMbedding<List_idx>[:STATe] CALCulate<Ch>:TRANsform:VNETworks:PPAir:DEEMbedding<List_idx>:PARame ters:C<no> STSC | SCST | CSSL | LSSC | CSSC | SLCS | SCLS | SCCS,<numeric_value>...
  • Page 725 ® ® ® R&S ZVA / R&S ZVB / R&S Command Reference SCPI Command Reference CALCulate<Ch>:TRANsform:VNETworks:PPAir:DEEMbedding<List_id x>:DEFine <no> Number of inductance in circuit model. If unspecified the numeric suffix is set to Range [def. unit] 1 to 3 [–] The number of inductances depends on the selected circuit model.
  • Page 726 ® ® ® R&S ZVA / R&S ZVB / R&S Command Reference SCPI Command Reference Example: *RST; :CALC:TRAN:VNET:PPA:DEEM:DEF 1,2; CALC:TRAN:VNET:PPA:DEEM:PAR:R1? CSSL; R2? CSSL; R3? CSSL Create a list of port pairs and query the default resistances for the Serial Cs, shunt L circuit model.
  • Page 727 ® ® ® R&S ZVA / R&S ZVB / R&S Command Reference SCPI Command Reference Fine Parameters Possible circuit models (character data); see circuit models. *RST value CSSL SCPI, Device-specific, command or query. Command Types Example: CALCulate<Ch>:TRANsform:VNETworks:PPAir:DEEMbedding[:STATe] CALCulate<Ch>:TRANsform:VNETworks:PPAir:EMBedding<List_idx>:DEFine <first port no>, <second port no>{, <first port no>, <second port no>} Defines a list of port pairs for port pair embedding.
  • Page 728 ® ® ® R&S ZVA / R&S ZVB / R&S Command Reference SCPI Command Reference CALCulate<Ch>:TRANsform:VNETworks:PPAir:EMBedding<List_idx>:PARameter s:C<no> STSC | SCST | CSSL | LSSC | CSSC | SLCS | SCLS | SCCS,<numeric_value> Specifies the capacitance values C1, C2, C3 in the different circuit models for port pair embedding.
  • Page 729 ® ® ® R&S ZVA / R&S ZVB / R&S Command Reference SCPI Command Reference <numeric_value> Inductance L<no> for the specified circuit model. –12 –1H to 1 H [H]. The increment is 1 pH (10 Range [def. unit] –9 *RST value...
  • Page 730 ® ® ® R&S ZVA / R&S ZVB / R&S Command Reference SCPI Command Reference CALCulate<Ch>:TRANsform:VNETworks:PPAir:EMBedding<List_idx>[:STATe] <Boolean> Enables or disables the embedding function for port pairs. It is allowed to change the circuit model and its parameters while embedding is enabled.
  • Page 731 ® ® ® R&S ZVA / R&S ZVB / R&S Command Reference SCPI Command Reference CALCulate<Ch>:TRANsform:VNETworks:SENDed:DEEMbedding<Ph_pt>:PARame ters:C<no> CSL | LSC | CSC | SLC | SCL | SCC,<numeric_value> Specifies the capacitance values C1, C2 in the different circuit models for single ended port deembedding.
  • Page 732 ® ® ® R&S ZVA / R&S ZVB / R&S Command Reference SCPI Command Reference specified circuit model. Example: *RST; :CALC:TRAN:VNET:SEND:DEEM:PAR:L1? SLL Query the default inductance L1 for the Shunt L, serial L circuit model. The response is 1E-009 (1 nH).
  • Page 733 ® ® ® R&S ZVA / R&S ZVB / R&S Command Reference SCPI Command Reference ON – Deembedding active <Boolean> OFF – Deembedding inactive *RST value OFF [–] SCPI, Command Device-specific, command or query Types Example: CALC:TRAN:VNET:SEND:DEEM:TND CSL Select the Serial C, shunt L circuit model for deembedding.
  • Page 734 ® ® ® R&S ZVA / R&S ZVB / R&S Command Reference SCPI Command Reference the specified circuit model. Example: *RST; :CALC:TRAN:VNET:SEND:EMB:PAR:C2? CSC Query the default capacitance C2 for the Serial C, shunt C circuit model. The response is 1E-012 (1 pF).
  • Page 735 ® ® ® R&S ZVA / R&S ZVB / R&S Command Reference SCPI Command Reference Range [def. unit] 1 to 2 [–] The number of resistances depends on the selected circuit model. Parameters Possible circuit models (character data); see circuit models.

  • Page 736: Configure

    ® ® ® R&S ZVA / R&S ZVB / R&S Command Reference SCPI Command Reference <Ph_pt> Physical port number Parameters Possible circuit models (character data); see circuit models. *RST value SCPI, Command Types Device-specific, command or query. Example: CALCulate<Ch>:TRANsform:VNETworks:SENDed:EMBedding[:STATe] CONFigure CONFigure...
  • Page 737 ® ® ® R&S ZVA / R&S ZVB / R&S Command Reference SCPI Command Reference <Ch> Number of an existing channel. '<Ch_name>' Channel name, e.g. 'Channel 4'. *RST value 'Ch1' SCPI, Command Types Device-specific, command or query. Example: CONFigure:CHANnel<Ch>:CATalog? CONFigure:CHANnel<Ch>:NAME:ID? '<Ch_name>' Queries the channel number (numeric suffix) of a channel with known channel name.
  • Page 738 ® ® ® R&S ZVA / R&S ZVB / R&S Command Reference SCPI Command Reference CONFigure:CHANnel<Ch>[:STATe] <Boolean> Creates or deletes channel no. <Ch> and selects it as the active channel. CONFigure:CHANnel<Ch>:NAME defines the channel name. A channel created with CONFigure:CHANnel<Ch>[:STATe] ON can be configured but has no CALCulate<Ch>:PARameter:SDEFine...
  • Page 739 ® ® ® R&S ZVA / R&S ZVB / R&S Command Reference SCPI Command Reference CONFigure:TRACe<Trc>:CHANnel:NAME? '<Trc_name>' Queries the channel name for an existing trace named '<Trc_name>'. <Trc> Trace number. This suffix is ignored; the trace is referenced by its name.

  • Page 740: Control

    ® ® ® R&S ZVA / R&S ZVB / R&S Command Reference SCPI Command Reference returns the actual trace number). '<Trc_name>' Trace name, e.g. 'Ch2Trc2'. – *RST value SCPI, Command Device-specific, command or query. Types Example: CONFigure:TRACe<Trc>:CATalog? CONFigure:TRACe<Trc>:REName '<Old_Tr_Name>', '<New_Tr_Name>' Assigns a new name to a trace.
  • Page 741 ® ® ® R&S ZVA / R&S ZVB / R&S Command Reference SCPI Command Reference CONTrol:AUXiliary:C[:DATA]). Up to 2 x 8 = 16 additional channel bits are available. <numeric_value> Decimal value . Range [def. unit] 0 to 255 [–] The transferred values correspond to the following states of the Universal Interface connector: 0 –...
  • Page 742 ® ® ® R&S ZVA / R&S ZVB / R&S Command Reference SCPI Command Reference channel bits is started. They are changed whenever a channel with different channel bits becomes the measuring channel.  The signals at the USER CONTROL connector are maintained after the analyzer enters the hold state.
  • Page 743 ® ® ® R&S ZVA / R&S ZVB / R&S Command Reference SCPI Command Reference CONTrol:HANDler:A[:DATA] <decimal> CONTrol:HANDler:B[:DATA] <decimal> CONTrol:HANDler:C[:DATA] <decimal> CONTrol:HANDler:D[:DATA] <decimal> CONTrol:HANDler:E[:DATA] <decimal> CONTrol:HANDler:F[:DATA] <decimal> The setting commands write data to ports A, B, C, D, E, F. To write data to a port, the port must be configured as an output port (see example).
  • Page 744 ® ® ® R&S ZVA / R&S ZVB / R&S Command Reference SCPI Command Reference CONTrol:HANDler:RESet to restore default values. SCPI, Command Device-specific, command or query Types Example: CONTrol:HANDler:A[:DATA] CONTrol:HANDler[:EXTension]:INDex:STATe <Boolean> Selects the digital signal that is routed to pin 20 of the Universal Interface connector.
  • Page 745 ® ® ® R&S ZVA / R&S ZVB / R&S Command Reference SCPI Command Reference 1 – /OUTPUT1 (pin 3) 2 – /OUTPUT2 (pin 4) 0 – high <binary> 1 – low The parameters MIN, MAX, DEF are not supported.

  • Page 746: Diagnostic

    ® ® ® R&S ZVA / R&S ZVB / R&S Command Reference SCPI Command Reference DIAGnostic This subsystem provides access to service and diagnostic routines used in service, maintenance and repair. In accordance with the SCPI standard all commands are device-specific.
  • Page 747 ® ® ® R&S ZVA / R&S ZVB / R&S Command Reference SCPI Command Reference DIAG:ALC:POFFset ON Change last setting; cause the analyzer to use the ALC offset of the previous measurement. DIAGnostic:ALC:BW <bandwidth> [Deprecated command, replaced by SOURce<Ch>:POWer<Pt>:ALC:BANDwidth] Selects the bandwidth in the ALC control loop. The setting takes effect when automatic bandwidth setting is disabled.
  • Page 748 ® ® ® R&S ZVA / R&S ZVB / R&S Command Reference SCPI Command Reference DIAGnostic:ALC:PIParameter:GAIN <prop_gain> [Deprecated command, replaced by SOURce<Ch>:POWer<Pt>:ALC:PIParameter:GAIN] Defines the proportional gain of the PI controller. This setting takes effect when manual setting of the MANual).
  • Page 749 ® ® ® R&S ZVA / R&S ZVB / R&S Command Reference SCPI Command Reference Defines the maximum change of the source signal level due to the ALC (Control Range). <cont_range> Control range setting Range [def. unit] 0 dB to 100 dB [dB]. The control range setting must be compatible with the specified source power of the analyzer.

  • Page 750: Display

    ® ® ® R&S ZVA / R&S ZVB / R&S Command Reference SCPI Command Reference SCPI, Device-specific, command or query. Command Types Example: DIAG:DEV:STAT 'report_16112010_1120' Generate a report and store it to C:\Program Files\Rohde&Schwarz\Network Analyzer\Report\report_16112010_1120.zip. Use the MMEMory... commands to rename, move, or delete the file.
  • Page 751 ® ® ® R&S ZVA / R&S ZVB / R&S Command Reference SCPI Command Reference <Trace_Name>). While assigned to diagram areas (DISPlay:WINDow<Wnd>:TRACe<WndTr>:FEED this assignment is valid, the trace is identified by the numeric suffix <WndTr> and the trace name is not needed.
  • Page 752 ® ® ® R&S ZVA / R&S ZVB / R&S Command Reference SCPI Command Reference Types Example: See DISPlay:CMAP<Element>:RGB. DISPlay:CMAP<Element>:RGB <red>, <green>, <blue> [,<trace_style>, <trace_width>] Defines the color of all display elements based on the Red/Green/Blue color model. <Element> Number of the display element. The display elements corresponding to the numbers 1 to 28 are listed below.
  • Page 753 ® ® ® R&S ZVA / R&S ZVB / R&S Command Reference SCPI Command Reference <Element> Display Element Background Text Selected Text Grid Reference Line Same Color for all Markers Horizontal Line / Vertical Range Lines Diagram Title Limit Fail Trace Color...
  • Page 754 ® ® ® R&S ZVA / R&S ZVB / R&S Command Reference SCPI Command Reference *RST value *RST does not affect the color settings; see also description of the Preset command. SCPI, Command Device-specific, command or query Types Example: *RST; :DISP:CMAP13:RGB 1,0,0 Create diagram area no.
  • Page 755 ® ® ® R&S ZVA / R&S ZVB / R&S Command Reference SCPI Command Reference Color the default trace 'Trc1' red.. See also DISPlay:CMAP<Element>:RGB DISPlay:MENU:KEY:EXECute '<menu_key>' Executes the function of a key with a specified name and switches to the local screen.
  • Page 756 ® ® ® R&S ZVA / R&S ZVB / R&S Command Reference SCPI Command Reference SCPI, Command Device-specific, no query Types Example: *RST; :DISP:MENU:KEY:SEL 'S11' Open the Trace – Meas menu in order to select a measured quantity. DISPlay:RFSize <rel. size>...
  • Page 757 ® ® ® R&S ZVA / R&S ZVB / R&S Command Reference SCPI Command Reference Display the generated trace in diagram area no. 2, assigning the trace number 9 to DISP:WIND2:TRAC:CAT? Query all traces in diagram area no. 2. The response is '9,Win2_Tr1'.
  • Page 758 ® ® ® R&S ZVA / R&S ZVB / R&S Command Reference SCPI Command Reference <Boolean> ON | OFF - Creates or deletes diagram area no. <Wnd>. – *RST value SCPI, Command Device-specific, command or query (returns whether or not a particular Types diagram area exists).
  • Page 759 ® ® ® R&S ZVA / R&S ZVB / R&S Command Reference SCPI Command Reference DISPlay[:WINDow<Wnd>]:TRACe<WndTr>:CATalog? Returns the numbers and names of all traces in diagram area no. <Wnd>. <Wnd> Number of a diagram area. <WndTr> Trace number used to distinguish the traces of the same diagram area <Wnd>.
  • Page 760 ® ® ® R&S ZVA / R&S ZVB / R&S Command Reference SCPI Command Reference DISPlay[:WINDow<Wnd>]:TRACe<WndTr>:EFEed '<trace_name>' <Trace_Name>) to a diagram area Assigns an existing trace (CALCulate<Ch>:PARameter:SDEFine DISPlay[:WINDow<Wnd>]:TRACe<WndTr>:FEED <Wnd>, and displays the trace. Use to assign the trace to a diagram area using a numeric suffix (e.g. in order to use the DISPlay[:WINDow<Wnd>]:TRACe<WndTr>:Y:OFFSet...
  • Page 761 ® ® ® R&S ZVA / R&S ZVB / R&S Command Reference SCPI Command Reference Types Example: CALC4:PAR:SDEF 'Ch4Tr1', 'S11' Create channel 4 and a trace named Ch4Tr1 to measure the input reflection coefficient S11. DISP:WIND2:STAT ON Create diagram area no. 2.
  • Page 762 ® ® ® R&S ZVA / R&S ZVB / R&S Command Reference SCPI Command Reference Query whether all data traces are displayed. The response 0 means that at least one trace is hidden. DISPlay[:WINDow<Wnd>]:TRACe<WndTr>:X:OFFSet <numeric_value> Shifts the trace <WndTr> in horizontal direction, leaving the positions of all markers unchanged.
  • Page 763 ® ® ® R&S ZVA / R&S ZVB / R&S Command Reference SCPI Command Reference *RST value SCPI, Command Device-specific, with query. Types Example: *RST; :DISP:WIND:TRAC:X:OFFS 1MHZ; :DISP:WIND:TRAC:Y:OFFS 10 Create the default trace and shift it horizontally by 1 MHz, vertically by 10 dB.
  • Page 764 ® ® ® R&S ZVA / R&S ZVB / R&S Command Reference SCPI Command Reference <WndTr> Existing trace number, assigned by means of DISPlay:WINDow<Wnd>:TRACe<WndTr>:FEED. This suffix is ignored if the optional <trace_name> parameter is used. <lower_value> Value and unit for the lower diagram edge.
  • Page 765 ® ® ® R&S ZVA / R&S ZVB / R&S Command Reference SCPI Command Reference parameter displayed in a dB Mag diagram is 10 dB. '<trace_name>' Optional string parameter for the trace name, e.g. 'Trc4'. If this optional parameter is present, both numeric suffixes are ignored (trace names must be unique across different channels and windows).
  • Page 766 ® ® ® R&S ZVA / R&S ZVB / R&S Command Reference SCPI Command Reference Example: CALC4:PAR:SDEF 'Ch4Tr1', 'S11' Create channel 4 and a trace named Ch4Tr1 to measure the input reflection coefficient S11. DISP:WIND2:STAT ON Create diagram area no. 2.
  • Page 767 ® ® ® R&S ZVA / R&S ZVB / R&S Command Reference SCPI Command Reference DISP:WIND2:TRAC9:Y:RPOS 50 or: DISP:WIND2:TRAC:Y:RPOS 50, 'CH4TR1' Set the reference position to the center of the diagram area. DISPlay[:WINDow<Wnd>]:TRACe<WndTr>:Y[:SCALe]:TOP <upper_value>[, '<trace_name>'] Sets the upper (maximum) edge of the diagram area <Wnd>.

  • Page 768: Format

    ® ® ® R&S ZVA / R&S ZVB / R&S Command Reference SCPI Command Reference Dimensionless UNIT, MUNIT, UUNIT, NUNIT, PUNIT, FUNIT FORMat... This subsystem selects a data format for transferring numeric and array information from and to the analyzer.

  • Page 769: Hcopy

    ® ® ® R&S ZVA / R&S ZVB / R&S Command Reference SCPI Command Reference Select real data format. SYST:COMM:GPIB:RTER EOI Set the terminator to EOI. (During a calibration) ... CORR:CDAT? 'REFLTRACK',1,0 Query a system error correction term. The data is transferred in a definite length block which can be written to a file;...
  • Page 770 ® ® ® R&S ZVA / R&S ZVB / R&S Command Reference SCPI Command Reference <string> | Printer name, string variable. One of the printers accessible from the analyzer. Print to file. The file name is defined via MMEMory:NAME. The command...
  • Page 771 ® ® ® R&S ZVA / R&S ZVB / R&S Command Reference SCPI Command Reference HCOPy[:IMMediate] Initializes the print according to the current HCOPy... configuration. – *RST value SCPI, Command Types Confirmed, no query. Example: COP:DEST '<Printer_name>' Select the printer for the output of screen data.
  • Page 772 ® ® ® R&S ZVA / R&S ZVB / R&S Command Reference SCPI Command Reference printing. HCOPy:ITEM:MLISt[:STATe] <Boolean> Qualifies whether or not the printed output contains the information in the marker info field (marker list). <Boolean> ON | OFF - Marker list is included or excluded.
  • Page 773 ® ® ® R&S ZVA / R&S ZVB / R&S Command Reference SCPI Command Reference SCPI, Command Types Device-specific, command or query Example: HCOPy:DESTination HCOPy:MITem:TIME[:STATe] <Boolean> Qualifies whether or not the printed file contains the current date and time. 'MMEM').
  • Page 774 ® ® ® R&S ZVA / R&S ZVB / R&S Command Reference SCPI Command Reference HCOPy:PAGE:MARGin:LEFT <numeric_value> Defines the distance between the left edge of the page and the left edge of the printed information. <numeric_value> Left margin. Range [def. unit] 0.01 mm to 10000 mm [mm]...

  • Page 775: Initiate

    ® ® ® R&S ZVA / R&S ZVB / R&S Command Reference SCPI Command Reference SCPI, Command Types Confirmed, command or query Example: COP:PAGE:ORI LAND; :HCOP Select landscape page orientation and start printing. HCOPy:PAGE:WINDow ACTive | ALL | SINGle Defines the number of diagram areas per printed page.

  • Page 776: Input

    ® ® ® R&S ZVA / R&S ZVB / R&S Command Reference SCPI Command Reference State that a single sweep will be performed in the active channel only. CALC2:PAR:SDEF 'TRC2','S11'; :INIT2 Create channel no. 2 with a new trace and start a single sweep in channel no. 2.

  • Page 777: Instrument

    ® ® ® R&S ZVA / R&S ZVB / R&S Command Reference SCPI Command Reference INPut<port_no>:ATTenuation <numeric_value> Sets the attenuation for the received waves. The generated wave is attenuated via OUTPut<port_no>:ATTenuation. Note: INPut<port_no>:ATTenuation is not channel-specific; the value is valid for all channels. Use [SENSe<Ch>:]POWer:ATTenuation...

  • Page 778: Memory

    ® ® ® R&S ZVA / R&S ZVB / R&S Command Reference SCPI Command Reference INSTrument:PORT:COUNt? Returns the number of test ports of the analyzer. Response Number of ports (integer number). Range [def. unit] 1, 2, 3 or 4, depending on the analyzer model.
  • Page 779 ® ® ® R&S ZVA / R&S ZVB / R&S Command Reference SCPI Command Reference Example: *RST; :MEM:DEF 'SETUP_2' Create a setup named 'Setup_2' and make it the active setup. MEM:CAT? Query all setups. The response is 'Set1,Setup_2'. MEM:STOR:STAT 1, 'C:\Program Files\Rohde&Schwarz\Network Analyzer\RecallSets\Setup_2.zvx';...

  • Page 780: Mmemory

    ® ® ® R&S ZVA / R&S ZVB / R&S Command Reference SCPI Command Reference setup. MEM:SEL 'Set1' Activate the default setup Set1. MEM:SEL? Returns 'Set1'. MEM:STOR:STAT 1, 'C:\Program Files\Rohde&Schwarz\Network Analyzer\RecallSets\Set1.zvx'; :MEM:DEL 'Set1.zvx' Store the active setup Set1 to a file, renaming it Set1.zvx. Close the setup.
  • Page 781 ® ® ® R&S ZVA / R&S ZVB / R&S Command Reference SCPI Command Reference Convert and copy the factory calibration data of the active calibration unit to the specified directory. MMEMory:AKAL:USER:CONVersion '<directory_name>'[,'<file_name>'] Converts an arbitrary (e.g. user-defined) set of calibration data of the standards in the active calibration unit (SYSTem:COMMunicate:RDEVice:AKAL:ADDRess) to Touchstone format and copies it to the specified directory.
  • Page 782 ® ® ® R&S ZVA / R&S ZVB / R&S Command Reference SCPI Command Reference Response Directory information in the following format: <used_size>,<free_disk_space> {,<file_name>,,<file_size>} The first two numeric parameters denote the total amount of storage currently used in the directory and the total amount of storage available, both expressed in bytes.
  • Page 783 ® ® ® R&S ZVA / R&S ZVB / R&S Command Reference SCPI Command Reference '<directory_name>' String parameter to specify the directory. If DEFault is used, the analyzer selects the default directory 'C:\Program Files\Rohde&Schwarz\Network Analyzer'. – (A *RST does not change the current directory)
  • Page 784 ® ® ® R&S ZVA / R&S ZVB / R&S Command Reference SCPI Command Reference MMEMory:DELete '<file_name>'[, FORCe] Removes a file from the specified directory. '<file_name>' String parameter containing the path and file name of the removed file. If the path is omitted, the current directory is used (see MMEMory:CDIRectory).
  • Page 785 ® ® ® R&S ZVA / R&S ZVB / R&S Command Reference SCPI Command Reference Example: MMEM:LOAD:CKIT 'C:\Program Files\Rohde&Schwarz\Network Analyzer\Calibration\Kits\New_kit.calkit' Load the previously created cal kit file New_kit.calkit from the default cal kit directory..:MMEM:STOR:CKIT 'New_kit', 'C:\Program Files\Rohde&Schwarz\Network Analyzer\Calibration\Kits\New_kit.calkit' Store the data for the user-defined cal kit Newkit and overwrite the cal kit file New_kit.calkit.
  • Page 786 ® ® ® R&S ZVA / R&S ZVB / R&S Command Reference SCPI Command Reference Example: MMEM:LOAD:CKIT:SDAT 'N 50 Ohm','Default Kit',MOPEN,'Test data','test.s1p',1 Load the file Test.s1p from the current directory in order to define the properties of an Open (m) standard in the cal kit named Default Kit for the N 50 Ω...
  • Page 787 ® ® ® R&S ZVA / R&S ZVB / R&S Command Reference SCPI Command Reference MMEMory:LOAD:CMAP '<file_name>' Loads a color scheme from a specified NWA color scheme file. '<file_name>' String parameter to specify the name and directory of the color scheme file to be loaded.
  • Page 788 ® ® ® R&S ZVA / R&S ZVB / R&S Command Reference SCPI Command Reference Query the cal group file for channel 2. Response: 'Calgroup1.cal' MMEM:LOAD:CORR:RES 2,'Calgroup1.cal' Resolve the pool link between channel 2 and the cal group file. MMEM:LOAD:CORR? 2 Query the cal group file for channel 2.
  • Page 789 ® ® ® R&S ZVA / R&S ZVB / R&S Command Reference SCPI Command Reference is FRTR0104. CORR:COLL:SAVE:SEL:DEF; :MMEM:STOR:CORR 1, 'P1-P4.cal' Create a default calibration data set for the selected calibration and store the data to a cal group file.
  • Page 790 ® ® ® R&S ZVA / R&S ZVB / R&S Command Reference SCPI Command Reference MMEMory:SETTings:RENorm:RIMPedance setting is ignored. ASCII file data (*.csv, *.pmcl) are never renormalized. '<file name>' String parameter to specify the name and directory of the loaded trace file. The analyzer supports power meter correction list files (*.pmcl, to be generated using...
  • Page 791 ® ® ® R&S ZVA / R&S ZVB / R&S Command Reference SCPI Command Reference power and time sweeps are Hz, dB and s, respectively.] *RST value <y_offset> Response offset for limit lines loaded from a Touchstone file. A 1 dB offset shifts the limit line by 1 dB in (positive) vertical direction.
  • Page 792 ® ® ® R&S ZVA / R&S ZVB / R&S Command Reference SCPI Command Reference SENSe<Ch>:FREQuency:MDELay... controlled using the commands. <Channel> Channel number – *RST value '<file_name>' String parameter to specify the name and directory of the loaded file. The default extension (manual control) for files containing known delays is *.csv, although other...
  • Page 793 ® ® ® R&S ZVA / R&S ZVB / R&S Command Reference SCPI Command Reference SENS1:FREQ:MDELay:CORR OFF Disable the current correction (if a correction is on). SENS1:FREQ:MDEL:ACQ Take a calibration sweep. MMEM:STOR:MDCD 1, 'C:\Program Files\Rohde&Schwarz\Network Analyzer\Calibration\MixerDelay\Mixer1.mcal' Store the measured calibration data for the calibration mixer to a file.
  • Page 794 ® ® ® R&S ZVA / R&S ZVB / R&S Command Reference SCPI Command Reference MMEMory:LOAD:RIPPle '<trc_name>','<file_name>' Loads a ripple limit definition from a specified file and assigns it to a trace with a specified name. Ripple CALCulate<Chn>:RIPPle... limits are created using the commands.
  • Page 795 ® ® ® R&S ZVA / R&S ZVB / R&S Command Reference SCPI Command Reference Command Types Example: Assume that the current setup contains two channels numbered 1 and 2, respectively, and that sweep segments have been defined for channel no. 1.
  • Page 796 ® ® ® R&S ZVA / R&S ZVB / R&S Command Reference SCPI Command Reference MMEMory:LOAD:TRACe '<trc name>','<file name>'[,'<parameter name/trace identifier>'] Loads trace data from a specified trace file and assigns it to a trace with a specified name. Traces are CALCulate<Ch>:PARameter:SDEFine...
  • Page 797 ® ® ® R&S ZVA / R&S ZVB / R&S Command Reference SCPI Command Reference file. MMEM:LOAD:TRAC 'TRC1', 'C:\Program Files\Rohde&Schwarz\Network Analyzer\Traces\Trc1.s2p' Load the previously created Touchstone file and overwrite the previously generated memory trace assigned to Trc1 with the trace.
  • Page 798 ® ® ® R&S ZVA / R&S ZVB / R&S Command Reference SCPI Command Reference MMEMory:LOAD:VNETworks<Ch>:BALanced:EMBedding<Log_pt> '<file_name>', PMAin | PSECondary[, IPORts] Loads data from a specified Touchstone file defining a balanced port circuit model for embedding. Select a balanced port circuit model involving file import before using the command.
  • Page 799 ® ® ® R&S ZVA / R&S ZVB / R&S Command Reference SCPI Command Reference SCPI, Device-specific, no query. Command Types Example: CALC:TRAN:VNET:GLO:DEEM:TND FIMP Select the 1-Port Data (s1p) circuit model. MMEM:LOAD:VNET:GLO:DEEM2 'C:\Program Files\Rohde&Schwarz\Network Analyzer\VNET\Test.s1p' Load a Touchstone file. MMEMory:LOAD:VNETworks<Ch>:GLOop:EMBedding '<file_name>' Loads data from a specified one-port (*.s1p)
  • Page 800 ® ® ® R&S ZVA / R&S ZVB / R&S Command Reference SCPI Command Reference assignment. If no path is specified the analyzer searches the current directory, to be queried with MMEMory:CDIRectory?. Parameters Port assignment for two 2-port (*.s2p) files: PMAin –...
  • Page 801 ® ® ® R&S ZVA / R&S ZVB / R&S Command Reference SCPI Command Reference – *RST value SCPI, Device-specific, no query. Command Types Example: CALC:TRAN:VNET:PPA:EMB:DEF 1,2,3,4 RST; : Define a port pair configuration with two port pairs (<List_idx> = 1 or 2).
  • Page 802 ® ® ® R&S ZVA / R&S ZVB / R&S Command Reference SCPI Command Reference MMEMory:LOAD:VNETworks<Ch>:SENDed:EMBedding<Ph_pt> '<file_name>'[, IPORts] Loads data from a specified two-port (*.s2p) Touchstone file defining a single ended circuit model for embedding. Select the single end. Select the single ended port circuit model involving file import (FIMPort)before using the command.
  • Page 803 ® ® ® R&S ZVA / R&S ZVB / R&S Command Reference SCPI Command Reference MMEMory:MOVE '<file_source>','<file_destination>' Moves a file to the indicated directory and stores it under the file name specified, if any. If <file_destination> contains no path indication, the command renames the file without moving it.
  • Page 804 ® ® ® R&S ZVA / R&S ZVB / R&S Command Reference SCPI Command Reference Removes the specified directory. MMEMory:SETTings:RENorm:MODE AUTO | EXPLicit Controls the renormalization rules for data export and import globally. AUTO The analyzer uses default renormalization rules; refer to the documentation of the...
  • Page 805 ® ® ® R&S ZVA / R&S ZVB / R&S Command Reference SCPI Command Reference Example: MMEMory:SETTings:RENorm:MODE MMEMory:SETTings:RENorm:STATe <Boolean> Enables or disables renormalization during Touchstone file export and import. This setting is valid in explicit mode only (MMEMory:SETTings:RENorm:MODE EXPLicit). ON | OFF – enable or disable renormalization.
  • Page 806 ® ® ® R&S ZVA / R&S ZVB / R&S Command Reference SCPI Command Reference '<ckit_name>' Name of a user-defined calibration kit available on the analyzer. It is not possible to modify or store predefined or ideal kits. '<ckit_label>' Label of the calibration kit, usually its serial number.
  • Page 807 ® ® ® R&S ZVA / R&S ZVB / R&S Command Reference SCPI Command Reference MMEMory:STORe:CORRection:TCOefficient '<file name>' Saves the current power loss list to a specified power meter correction list file. '<file String parameter to specify the name and directory of the created power meter name>'...
  • Page 808 ® ® ® R&S ZVA / R&S ZVB / R&S Command Reference SCPI Command Reference Types Example: *RST Reset the analyzer, creating the default trace no. 1 in channel no. 1. CALC:MARK ON; MARK:X 1GHz Create marker no. 1 and place it to 1 GHz.
  • Page 809 ® ® ® R&S ZVA / R&S ZVB / R&S Command Reference SCPI Command Reference '<file_name>' String parameter to specify the name and directory of the created pulse train file. The default extension (manual control) for pulse train files is *.train, although other extensions are allowed.
  • Page 810 ® ® ® R&S ZVA / R&S ZVB / R&S Command Reference SCPI Command Reference MMEMory:STORe:STATe <numeric_value>,'<file_name>' Stores the configuration data of the current setup to a specified setup file. MMEMory:STORe:STATe renames the current setup, appending a .zvx extension. See example for MMEMory:LOAD:STATe.
  • Page 811 ® ® ® R&S ZVA / R&S ZVB / R&S Command Reference SCPI Command Reference traces for the full set of S-parameters; the '<trc_name>' is ignored. If no path is specified the analyzer uses the directory 'C:\Program Files\Rohde&Schwarz\Network Analyzer\RecallSets'. UNFormatted – Unformatted data export specified by the second optional...
  • Page 812 ® ® ® R&S ZVA / R&S ZVB / R&S Command Reference SCPI Command Reference <channel no.> | Channel number in the active setup. ALL – A separate file is created for each channel in the active setup. '<file_name>' String parameter to specify the name and directory of the created trace file.
  • Page 813 ® ® ® R&S ZVA / R&S ZVB / R&S Command Reference SCPI Command Reference MMEMory:STORe:TRACe:PORTs '<channel no.>','<file_name>', COMPlex | LINPhase | LOGPhase, <Port 1>[, <Port 2>, ...] Generates a Touchstone file for the specified ports. Corresponds to Export S-Matrix.

  • Page 814: Output

    ® ® ® R&S ZVA / R&S ZVB / R&S Command Reference SCPI Command Reference MMEMory:STORe:TRACe:PORTs:INComplete '<channel no.>','<file_name>', COMPlex | LINPhase | LOGPhase, <Port 1>[, <Port 2>, ...] Exports a (possibly) incomplete, uncalibrated set of S-parameters to an n-port Touchstone file (n > 1). The missing S-parameter columns are filled by zeros.
  • Page 815 ® ® ® R&S ZVA / R&S ZVB / R&S Command Reference SCPI Command Reference OUTPut<port_no>:ATTenuation [Deprecated command] Sets an attenuation factor for the generated wave transmitted at test port no. <Pt>. The incident wave is attenuated via INPut<Pt>:ATTenuation. OUTPut<Pt>:ATTenuation is not channel-specific; the value is valid for all channels. Use SOURce<Ch>:POWer<Pt>:ATTenuation...
  • Page 816 ® ® ® R&S ZVA / R&S ZVB / R&S Command Reference SCPI Command Reference PORT1 ... Test port number of the analyzer, 1 to 2, 3 or 4, depending on the analyzer model. *RST value PORT1 SCPI, Command Device-specific, with query.
  • Page 817 ® ® ® R&S ZVA / R&S ZVB / R&S Command Reference SCPI Command Reference OUTPut<Ch>:UPORt:BUSY:LINK <BusyCoupledTo> Defines the behavior of the BUSY output signal at pin no. 4 of the USER CONTROL connector on the rear panel of the analyzer.
  • Page 818 ® ® ® R&S ZVA / R&S ZVB / R&S Command Reference SCPI Command Reference <Ch> Channel number. <Seg> Sweep segment number. This suffix is ignored; the setting is valid for all segments. <Boolean> ON | OFF - Enables or disables segment bits.
  • Page 819 ® ® ® R&S ZVA / R&S ZVB / R&S Command Reference SCPI Command Reference #B0000 – no signal at any of the four pins 16, 17, 18, 19 #B0001 – output signal at pin 16 #B0010 – output signal at pin 17 #B0011 –...

  • Page 820: Program

    ® ® ® R&S ZVA / R&S ZVB / R&S Command Reference SCPI Command Reference  The signals at the USER CONTROL connector reflect the channel bits of the measuring channel, i.e. the channel for which the analyzer performs a sweep. This channel is not necessarily identical with the active channel.
  • Page 821 ® ® ® R&S ZVA / R&S ZVB / R&S Command Reference SCPI Command Reference PROGram[:SELected]:EXECute '<file_path>[ <command>]' Starts an application program or open a file using an application available on the analyzer. It is not possible to run several programs simultaneously. If the command PROGram[:SELected]:EXECute is sent while a previously started program is still executed, the analyzer generates a SCPI error –100,"Command error...".
  • Page 822 ® ® ® R&S ZVA / R&S ZVB / R&S Command Reference SCPI Command Reference PROGram[:SELected]:INIMessage '<file_path>', '<message>' PROGram[:SELected]:INIMessage? '<file_path>' Writes a <message> into the preferences file (*.ini) specified by <file_path>. The message is entered into the [MESSAGE] section using the fixed key Send. The value for the fixed key Receive is set to an empty string.
  • Page 823 ® ® ® R&S ZVA / R&S ZVB / R&S Command Reference SCPI Command Reference Name and path of the *.ini file. The *.ini extension may be omitted as it is '<file_path>' created automatically by the command. The specified path/directory must exist. If the *.ini file does not exist, it is created.

  • Page 824: Route

    ® ® ® R&S ZVA / R&S ZVB / R&S Command Reference SCPI Command Reference Parameters None. – *RST value SCPI, Command Confirmed, command or query. Types The query returns 1 as soon as the executed program is stopped or paused.
  • Page 825 ® ® ® R&S ZVA / R&S ZVB / R&S Command Reference SCPI Command Reference SCPI, Command Device-specific, with query. Types Example: *RST; :ROUT:CFIL? Reset the analyzer and query the default configuration state. The response is 1 (default settings are used).

  • Page 826: Sense...]

    ® ® ® R&S ZVA / R&S ZVB / R&S Command Reference SCPI Command Reference [SENSe...] [SENSe<Ch>:]AVERage... This subsystem sets sweep averaging parameters. The sweep average is a noise-reduction technique which consists of calculating each measurement point as an average of the same measurement point over several consecutive sweeps.
  • Page 827 ® ® ® R&S ZVA / R&S ZVB / R&S Command Reference SCPI Command Reference of sweep averaging. <Ch> Channel number. Response Number of current sweep Range [def. unit] 1 to the average factor ([SENSe<Ch>:]AVERage:COUNt) [1] *RST value SCPI, Command Types...
  • Page 828 ® ® ® R&S ZVA / R&S ZVB / R&S Command Reference SCPI Command Reference Set a resolution bandwidth of approx. 1.1 Hz for channel 1. BAND? The analyzer returns the rounded bandwidth of 2 Hz. [SENSe<Ch>:]BANDwidth|BWIDth[:RESolution]:DREDuction <Boolean> Enables or disables dynamic bandwidth reduction at low frequencies.
  • Page 829 ® ® ® R&S ZVA / R&S ZVB / R&S Command Reference SCPI Command Reference [SENSe<Ch>:]CONVerter:AMODel <Boolean> [Deprecated command, superseded by SOURce<Ch>:POWer<Port>:CONVerter:TRANsfer:DESCription] Enables or disables the RF In Power (and Electronic Attenuator) with Linear Approximation power control LAPProx) on all method (SOURce<Ch>:POWer<Pt>:CONVerter:TRANsfer:DESCription...
  • Page 830 ® ® ® R&S ZVA / R&S ZVB / R&S Command Reference SCPI Command Reference Since FW version 3.40 this is a global setting. <Ch> Channel number. This suffix is ignored, the command affects all channels. Parameters Port<i> Power Control...
  • Page 831 ® ® ® R&S ZVA / R&S ZVB / R&S Command Reference SCPI Command Reference frequencies. <Ch> Channel number <Boolean> ON | OFF - Enable or disable "Cal and Corr at Base Freq". *RST value SCPI, Command Device-specific, command or query.
  • Page 832 ® ® R&S ZVA / R&S ZVB / R&S Command Reference SCPI Command Reference network analyzer with two ports i and j, each equipped with a test receiver and a reference receiver. The system errors are described in terms of two "error two-ports"...
  • Page 833 ® ® ® R&S ZVA / R&S ZVB / R&S Command Reference SCPI Command Reference Calibration type Parameters in Available error terms (depending on [SENSe<Ch>:]CORRection:COLLect:METHod:DEFine port numbers) Two-port FRTRans 'TRANSTRACK' normalization One path two port OPTPort 'DIRECTIVITY', 'SRCMATCH', 'REFLTRACK', 'TRANSTRACK'...
  • Page 834 ® ® ® R&S ZVA / R&S ZVB / R&S Command Reference SCPI Command Reference <conn_type> Connector type, one of the following identifiers: N50, N75: N 50 Ω or N 75 Ω connectors PC7, PC35, PC292: PC 7, PC 3.5 or 2.92 mm connectors SMA: Connector type SMA USER<no>: User-defined connectors UserConn1, UserConn2...
  • Page 835 ® ® ® R&S ZVA / R&S ZVB / R&S Command Reference SCPI Command Reference N50, N75: N 50 Ω or N 75 Ω connectors PC7, PC35, PC292: PC 7, PC 3.5 or 2.92 mm connectors SMA: User-defined connector type SMA...
  • Page 836 ® ® ® R&S ZVA / R&S ZVB / R&S Command Reference SCPI Command Reference Parameter Meaning Comment/Unit <Z0> Reference impedance (no unit) To be specified without unit (implicit unit is Ω) <C0> | <L0> Polynomial coefficients C or L...
  • Page 837 ® ® ® R&S ZVA / R&S ZVB / R&S Command Reference SCPI Command Reference <std_type> Meaning Parameters in [SENSe<Ch>:]CORRection:CKIT:<conn_type>:<std_type> OPEN | SHORt| MATCh MSMatch |FSMatch Sliding match (m) or '<Ckit_Name>' ... <Max_Freq>[, <Port_1>] sliding match (f) no offset parameters, no load parameters (polynomial coefficients), no...
  • Page 838 ® ® ® R&S ZVA / R&S ZVB / R&S Command Reference SCPI Command Reference CORR:CKIT:DEL 'NewKit1' Delete the previously created kit. [SENSe<Ch>:]CORRection:CKIT:INSTall '<file_name>' Loads cal kit data from a specified ZVR cal kit file. <Ch> Channel number. This suffix is ignored because calibration kits are channel- independent.
  • Page 839 ® ® ® R&S ZVA / R&S ZVB / R&S Command Reference SCPI Command Reference Example: CORR:CKIT:N50:FOPEN 'NewKit1','',0,1.8E+010,0.0151,0,0,0.22,-0.22,0.0022 Create a new cal kit NewKit1 and assign an open (f) standard for the N 50 Ω connector type with specific properties.
  • Page 840 ® ® ® R&S ZVA / R&S ZVB / R&S Command Reference SCPI Command Reference Analyzer\Calibration\Kits\New_kit.calkit' Load the previously created cal kit file New_kit.calkit from the default cal kit directory. ORR:CKIT:SEL 'N 50 Ohm', 'New_kit' Assign the imported kit to the N 50 Ω connector type (assuming that the cal kit name stored in New_kit.calkit reads New_kit).
  • Page 841 ® ® ® R&S ZVA / R&S ZVB / R&S Command Reference SCPI Command Reference For a complete list of standard types refer to the table of standard types. Parameter String parameters to specify the configured standard list ('<Conn_Name>','<Ckit_Name>','<Std_No>') and numeric parameters defining its properties.
  • Page 842 ® ® ® R&S ZVA / R&S ZVB / R&S Command Reference SCPI Command Reference N50, N75: N 50 Ω or N 75 Ω connectors PC7, PC35, PC292: PC 7, PC 3.5 or 2.92 mm connectors USER<no>: User-defined connectors UserConn1, UserConn2 SMA: User-defined connector type SMA ...
  • Page 843 ® ® ® R&S ZVA / R&S ZVB / R&S Command Reference SCPI Command Reference '<ckit_label>' String parameter containing the label of an imported or user-defined calibration kit available on the analyzer. – (A *RST does not affect calibration kits)
  • Page 844 ® ® ® R&S ZVA / R&S ZVB / R&S Command Reference SCPI Command Reference '<ckit_label>' Selects the calibration kit to be used, specifying its connector type, name, and label. The command is suitable for connector types with arbitrary, user-defined names. For standard connector types you can use the command [SENSe<Ch>:]CORRection:CKIT:<conn_type>:LSELect.
  • Page 845 ® ® ® R&S ZVA / R&S ZVB / R&S Command Reference SCPI Command Reference , <C1>, <C2>, <C3>, <L0>, <L1>, <L2>, <L3>[[, OPEN | SHORt | MATCh | <Resistance>], <Port_1>, <Port_2>] Defines the parameters of a non-ideal 1 port or 2-port calibration standard <std_type>. A particular physical standard can be selected by specifying the name and label of the calibration kit and the standard's serial number.
  • Page 846 ® ® ® R&S ZVA / R&S ZVB / R&S Command Reference SCPI Command Reference [SENSe<Ch>:]CORRection:COLLect[:ACQuire] THRough | OPEN1 | OPEN2 | OPEN12 | SHORT1 | SHORT2 | SHORT12 | MATCH1 | MATCH2 | MATCH12 | NET | ATT | IMATCH12 | REFL1 | REFL2 | SLIDE1 | SLIDE2 | SLIDE12 | LINE1 | LINE2 |...
  • Page 847 ® ® ® R&S ZVA / R&S ZVB / R&S Command Reference SCPI Command Reference [SENSe<Ch>:]CORRection:COLLect[:ACQuire]:RSAVe <Boolean> Activates or deactivates the calibration mode where the raw measurement data of the standards is stored after the calibration is completed. The setting is valid for the current calibration, where it overwrites the global setting ([SENSe<Ch>:]CORRection:COLLect[:ACQuire]:RSAVe:DEFault).
  • Page 848 ® ® R&S ZVA / R&S ZVB / R&S Command Reference SCPI Command Reference [SENSe<Ch>:]CORRection:COLLect[:ACQuire]:SELected THRough | OPEN | SHORt | MATCh | NET | ATT | REFL | SLIDe | LINE | LINE1 | LINE2 | LINE3 | LINEN, <index>...
  • Page 849 ® ® ® R&S ZVA / R&S ZVB / R&S Command Reference SCPI Command Reference SCPI, Device-specific, no query Command Types Example: See [SENSe<Ch>:]CORRection:COLLect:SAVE:SELected. [SENSe<Ch>:]CORRection:COLLect:AUTO '<file_name>',<port_no>{,<port_no>} Initiates a one-port, two-port, three-port or four-port automatic calibration at arbitrary analyzer and cal unit ports.
  • Page 850 ® ® ® R&S ZVA / R&S ZVB / R&S Command Reference SCPI Command Reference [SENSe<Ch>:]CORRection:COLLect:AUTO:ASSignment<Asg>:ACQuire for a previously defined port assignment numbered <Asg>. Initiates an automatic calibration A complete, valid set of port assignments must be defined before you can initiate a calibration; see program example.
  • Page 851 ® ® ® R&S ZVA / R&S ZVB / R&S Command Reference SCPI Command Reference CORR:COLL:AUTO:ASSignment1:DEFine? Query the first port assignment. The response is 1, 1, 2, 2. --> Connect the calibration unit between port 1 and 2 of the analyzer.
  • Page 852 ® ® ® R&S ZVA / R&S ZVB / R&S Command Reference SCPI Command Reference or written to a directory on the analyzer. The optional <characterizationMethod> defines the calibration types to be supported with this characterization (implicitly: the standards to be included in the characterization).
  • Page 853 ® ® ® R&S ZVA / R&S ZVB / R&S Command Reference SCPI Command Reference <Ch> Channel number (ignored) '<file_name>' Name and (possibly) directory of the created characterization / cal kit file (string parameter, extension *.calkit):  If no path and directory is specified, the file is stored in the calibration unit (see also [SENSe<Ch>:]CORRection:COLLect:AUTO).
  • Page 854 ® ® ® R&S ZVA / R&S ZVB / R&S Command Reference SCPI Command Reference stored in the active calibration unit.  A NWA cal kit file name without path but prefixed with SD: refers to a specific cal kit file stored on the SD card inserted at the active calibration unit.
  • Page 855 ® ® ® R&S ZVA / R&S ZVB / R&S Command Reference SCPI Command Reference SCPI, Command Device-specific, no query Types Example: CORR:COLL:AUTO:PORT '', 1, 2, 2, 4, 4, 1 Perform an automatic 3-port calibration at the analyzer test ports 1, 2, and 4 using the calibration unit's default calibration kit file and ports 2, 4, and 1 of the cal unit.
  • Page 856 ® ® ® R&S ZVA / R&S ZVB / R&S Command Reference SCPI Command Reference '<file_name>' Name and (possibly) directory of the characterization (cal kit file) to be used for the automatic calibration (string parameter):  If nothing is specified (empty string ' '), the factory cal kit file stored in the active calibration unit is used.
  • Page 857 ® ® ® R&S ZVA / R&S ZVB / R&S Command Reference SCPI Command Reference *RST value SCPI, Command Device-specific, command or query Types Example: [SENSe<Ch>:]CORRection:COLLect:AUTO:SAVE Calculates the error terms, based on the previously acquired calibration sweeps for multiple port assignments, saves the data and applies the calibration to the active channel <Ch>.
  • Page 858 ® ® ® R&S ZVA / R&S ZVB / R&S Command Reference SCPI Command Reference  If nothing is specified (empty string ' '), the factory cal kit file stored in the active calibration unit is used.  A NWA cal kit file name *.calkit without path denotes a specific cal kit file stored in the active calibration unit.
  • Page 859 ® ® R&S ZVA / R&S ZVB / R&S Command Reference SCPI Command Reference 2. As part of the calibration sequence a temporary channel is created, which must not be modified by any means. This channel is deleted when the SAVE command is called, so...
  • Page 860 ® ® ® R&S ZVA / R&S ZVB / R&S Command Reference SCPI Command Reference <Ch> Channel number <port_no> Port number of the analyzer. Note: If the analyzer is set to use the same connectors at all ports ALL), ([SENSe<Ch>:]CORRection:COLLect:CONNection<port_no>:PORTs then a change of a connector type is valid for all ports.
  • Page 861 ® ® ® R&S ZVA / R&S ZVB / R&S Command Reference SCPI Command Reference <port_no> Port number of the analyzer. This suffix is ignored; the command affects all ports. Parameters ALL: Equal (uniform) connector types. If the connector type at one port is changed, the connector type at all other ports is changed accordingly.
  • Page 862 ® ® ® R&S ZVA / R&S ZVB / R&S Command Reference SCPI Command Reference – *RST value SCPI, Device-specific, no query Command Types Example: CORR:COLL:METH:DEF 'Test',RSHort,1 Select a one-port normalization at port 1 with a short standard as calibration type.
  • Page 863 ® ® ® R&S ZVA / R&S ZVB / R&S Command Reference SCPI Command Reference Perform a fixture compensation sweep at port 2, terminated with an open standard, and at port 4, terminated with a short. CORR:COLL:FIXT:SAVE Save and apply the compensation data.
  • Page 864 ® ® ® R&S ZVA / R&S ZVB / R&S Command Reference SCPI Command Reference <Ch> Channel number (ignored) 1 – Auto Length (and Loss), depending on the last <Boolean> [SENSe<Ch>:]CORRection:COLLect:FIXTure:LMParameter:LOSS[:STATe] setting 0 – Direct Compensation *RST value SCPI, Device-specific, command or query...
  • Page 865 ® ® ® R&S ZVA / R&S ZVB / R&S Command Reference SCPI Command Reference <Ch> Channel number <Boolean> ON | OFF - Activates or deactivates calibrations (system error correction) at all selected intermodulation frequency ranges. *RST value SCPI, Command...
  • Page 866 ® ® ® R&S ZVA / R&S ZVB / R&S Command Reference SCPI Command Reference Parameter Type (Add Calibration dialog) FOPORT1 | FOPORT2 | Full One Port at port 1 | at port 2 | at port 1 and 2...
  • Page 867 ® ® ® R&S ZVA / R&S ZVB / R&S Command Reference SCPI Command Reference Example: See [SENSe<Ch>:]CORRection:COLLect:SAVE:SELected. The supported calibration types are listed below. Parameter Type (Add Calibration dialog) REFL | RSHort Refl Norm Open | Refl Norm Short...
  • Page 868 ® ® ® R&S ZVA / R&S ZVB / R&S Command Reference SCPI Command Reference [SENSe<Ch>:]CORRection:COLLect:NFIGure:END Terminates a noise figure calibration, discarding the acquired data (see note for [SENSe<Ch>:]CORRection:COLLect:NFIGure[:ACQuire]). <Ch> Channel number SCPI, Command Types Device-specific, no query Example: Noise Figure Measurement (condensed programming examples) [SENSe<Ch>:]CORRection:COLLect:NFIGure:SAVE...
  • Page 869 ® ® R&S ZVA / R&S ZVB / R&S Command Reference SCPI Command Reference provided, the reference plane shift is applied to the specified calibration only. An error is raised if no system error correction is defined for channel <Ch> (using [SENSe<Ch>:]CORRection:COLLect:METHod:DEFine).
  • Page 870 ® ® ® R&S ZVA / R&S ZVB / R&S Command Reference SCPI Command Reference SCPI, Command Confirmed, no query Types Example: CORR:COLL:METH REFL1 Select a one-port normalization at port 1 as calibration type. CORR:COLL OPEN1 Measure an open standard connected to port 1 and store the measurement results of this standard.
  • Page 871 ® ® ® R&S ZVA / R&S ZVB / R&S Command Reference SCPI Command Reference shift between the analyzer and the calibration plane). CORR:DATA 'SCORR3',<ASCII_data> Replace the dummy system error correction term with your own correction data, transferred in ASCII format.
  • Page 872 ® ® R&S ZVA / R&S ZVB / R&S Command Reference SCPI Command Reference The main purpose of the default correction data set is to provide a dummy system error correction which you can replace with your own, external correction data. You may have acquired the external data in a previous session or even on another instrument.
  • Page 873 ® ® ® R&S ZVA / R&S ZVB / R&S Command Reference SCPI Command Reference User-defined connector types must be defined before being addressed by [SENSe<Ch>:]CORRection:COLLect:CONNection<port_no> [SENSe<Ch>:]CORRection:COLLect:SCONnection<port_no>. *RST value 'N 50 Ohm',FEM for all ports. SCPI, Device-specific, command or query.
  • Page 874 ® ® ® R&S ZVA / R&S ZVB / R&S Command Reference SCPI Command Reference [SENSe<Ch>:]CORRection:CONNection:CATalog? Returns a list of the connector types of all calibration kits in use. <Ch> Channel number. This suffix is ignored because connectors are channel-independent.
  • Page 875 ® ® ® R&S ZVA / R&S ZVB / R&S Command Reference SCPI Command Reference [SENSe<Ch>:]CORRection:DATA 'SCORR1' | ... | 'SCORR12' | 'G11' | ... 'G22' | 'H11' | ... | H22' [Deprecated command] Writes or reads system error correction data for a specific channel <Ch> and calibration method ([SENSe<Ch>:]CORRection:COLLect:METHod).
  • Page 876 ® ® ® R&S ZVA / R&S ZVB / R&S Command Reference SCPI Command Reference  The error two-port P is assigned to port j of the analyzer. Its transmission matrix H describes how the system errors modify the measured incident and...
  • Page 877 ® ® ® R&S ZVA / R&S ZVB / R&S Command Reference SCPI Command Reference Calibration type Parameter in Available error terms (depending on port [SENSe<Ch>:]CORRection:COLLect:METHod numbers) reading only; the 'H21' matrix elements are normalized to 1) [SENSe<Ch>:]CORRection:DATA:PARameter<Cal>? [<info>] Returns the parameters of the active system error correction(s) for channel <Ch>. If only the factory calibration is available, an error is raised.
  • Page 878 ® ® ® R&S ZVA / R&S ZVB / R&S Command Reference SCPI Command Reference Parameter Response <info> STARt Start frequency (or CW frequency, if no frequency sweep is active) STOP Stop frequency (or CW frequency, if no frequency sweep is active)
  • Page 879 ® ® ® R&S ZVA / R&S ZVB / R&S Command Reference SCPI Command Reference <Ch> Channel number of the calibrated channel. Response Integer number. 0 means that no calibration is available. *RST value SCPI, Command Types Device-specific, query only Example: [SENSe<Ch>:]CORRection:DATA:PARameter<Cal>?
  • Page 880 ® ® ® R&S ZVA / R&S ZVB / R&S Command Reference SCPI Command Reference <port_no> Port number of the analyzer. This numeric suffix is ignored; the active port is determined by the active trace. ONCE Applies the Auto Length function.
  • Page 881 ® ® ® R&S ZVA / R&S ZVB / R&S Command Reference SCPI Command Reference <port_no> Port number of the analyzer <length> Electrical length –1E+9 m to +1E+9 m [m]. The increment (UP, DOWN) is 1 mm. Range [def. unit]...
  • Page 882 ® ® ® R&S ZVA / R&S ZVB / R&S Command Reference SCPI Command Reference SCPI, Command Types Device-specific, command or query Example: One and Two-Port Calibration [SENSe<Ch>:]CORRection:FACTory[:STATe] <Boolean> Enables or disables the factory calibration for all channels in the active setup.
  • Page 883 ® ® ® R&S ZVA / R&S ZVB / R&S Command Reference SCPI Command Reference SCPI, Command Device-specific, no query Types Example: *RST; :CORR:LOSS:AUTO ONCE Reset the instrument and apply the Auto Length and Loss function to the default trace (Trc1 in channel 1).
  • Page 884 ® ® ® R&S ZVA / R&S ZVB / R&S Command Reference SCPI Command Reference reset) SCPI, Command Device-specific, command or query Types Example: Noise Figure Measurement (condensed programming examples) [SENSe<Chn>:]CORRection:NSTate? Returns the noise figure calibration state label of active trace in channel <Chn>. The active trace must be a noise figure trace, otherwise an empty string is returned.
  • Page 885 ® ® ® R&S ZVA / R&S ZVB / R&S Command Reference SCPI Command Reference Use the [SENSe<Ch>:]CORRection:LOSS<port_no>... commands to define the complete set of loss offset parameters. [SENSe<Ch>:]CORRection:OFFSet<port_no>:MAGNitude is equivalent to [SENSe<Ch>:]CORRection:LOSS<port_no>:OFFSet <Ch> Channel number of the offset-corrected channel <port_no>...
  • Page 886 ® ® ® R&S ZVA / R&S ZVB / R&S Command Reference SCPI Command Reference NOMinal] Selects the wave quantity and the source for the receiver power calibration, starts the calibration sweep, and applies the receiver power correction. The command triggers an event and has no query form. The calibrated waves and the used source are not shown in the Receiver Power Cal dialog.
  • Page 887 ® ® ® R&S ZVA / R&S ZVB / R&S Command Reference SCPI Command Reference equal to the default source power value. See also example for SENSe<Ch>:]CORRection:POWer<port_no>[:STATe]. [SENSe<Ch>:]CORRection:POWer<port_no>:AWAVe[:STATe] <Boolean> Enables or disables the receiver power calibration for channel <Ch> and for the reference waves a .
  • Page 888 ® ® ® R&S ZVA / R&S ZVB / R&S Command Reference SCPI Command Reference specific. The command only applies to enhanced wave correction and has no effect on scalar power corrected wave quantities. It is not needed if calibration and power calibration are performed using the functions of the network analyzer.
  • Page 889 ® ® ® R&S ZVA / R&S ZVB / R&S Command Reference SCPI Command Reference source port, assuming that the transmitted source power a is correct. No external cabling is needed. CORR:POW:DATA? 'AWAV1' Query the correction values. The analyzer returns 10 comma-separated real numbers.
  • Page 890 ® ® ® R&S ZVA / R&S ZVB / R&S Command Reference SCPI Command Reference SOURce<Ch>:POWer<Pt>:CORRection:IMODulation:RPORt[:ACQuire]. <Ch> Channel number <port_no> Port number. This suffix is ignored; the analyzer calibrates the port that is selected as receive port for the intermodulation measurement ([SENSe<Ch>:]FREQuency:IMODulation:RECeiver).
  • Page 891 ® ® ® R&S ZVA / R&S ZVB / R&S Command Reference SCPI Command Reference Command Types Example: See SOURce<Ch>:POWer<Pt>:CORRection:MIXer:RF[:ACQuire]. [SENSe<Ch>:]CORRection:POWer<port_no>:MIXer:IF:NFIGure:ACQuire Starts the IF receiver calibration (2nd power calibration step for mixer noise figure measurements), stores and applies the calibration data.
  • Page 892 ® ® ® R&S ZVA / R&S ZVB / R&S Command Reference SCPI Command Reference to the default source power value. See also example for SENSe<Ch>:]CORRection:POWer<port_no>:ACQuire. [SENSe<Ch>:]CORRection:PSTate? Returns the power calibration state label of the active trace in channel <Ch>.
  • Page 893 ® ® ® R&S ZVA / R&S ZVB / R&S Command Reference SCPI Command Reference The response is 1. [SENSe<Ch>:]CORRection:STIMulus? Queries the stimulus values of the active calibration. A calibration must be selected before the command is executed; see example.
  • Page 894 ® ® ® R&S ZVA / R&S ZVB / R&S Command Reference SCPI Command Reference Example: COUP NONE Activate the alternating sweep mode. TRIG:LINK 'PPO' Set the triggered measurement sequence equal to one partial measurement. Each trigger event starts one partial measurement for all sweep points.
  • Page 895 ® ® ® R&S ZVA / R&S ZVB / R&S Command Reference SCPI Command Reference ON – Harmonic filter used <Boolean> OFF – No harmonic filter (through path) *RST value SCPI, Command Types Device-specific, command or query Example: [SENSe<Ch>:]EUNit:COMBiner[:STATe] [SENSe<Ch>:]EUNit:LNAMplifier[:STATe] <Boolean>...
  • Page 896 ® ® ® R&S ZVA / R&S ZVB / R&S Command Reference SCPI Command Reference Types Example: EUN:PGEN:INP:EXT ON Select an external pulse generator. EUN:PGEN:ASS G2Mall Use the pule generator signal 2 to control all three pulse modulators. EUN:PGEN:OUTP:EXT ON Select the EXT PULSE GENERATOR OUT connectors as output connectors for the pulse generator signals.
  • Page 897 ® ® ® R&S ZVA / R&S ZVB / R&S Command Reference SCPI Command Reference The frequency ranges for the different instrument models are listed below: ZVA8 ZVA24 ZVA40 ZVA50 ZVA67 Start, 300 kHz to 8 10 MHz to 25 GHz...
  • Page 898 ® ® ® R&S ZVA / R&S ZVB / R&S Command Reference SCPI Command Reference Enabling a (different) frequency converting measurement also resets the measured quantity; see program example below. <Ch> Channel number. FUNDamental Measurement of the fundamental signal (no frequency-converting mode).
  • Page 899 ® ® ® R&S ZVA / R&S ZVB / R&S Command Reference SCPI Command Reference [SENSe<Ch>:]FREQuency:CONVersion:ARBitrary <numerator>, <denominator>, <offset>, CW | FIXed | SWEep Defines the receiver frequency for frequency-converting measurements. The receiver frequency is either a range (for frequency sweeps) or a CW frequency (for power, time and CW Mode sweeps). The receiver frequency is valid for all ports.
  • Page 900 ® ® ® R&S ZVA / R&S ZVB / R&S Command Reference SCPI Command Reference Mode sweeps). The receiver frequency is valid for all ports. The frequency formula is applied even if the analyzer returns an error message, because the frequency is outside the allowed range.
  • Page 901 ® ® ® R&S ZVA / R&S ZVB / R&S Command Reference SCPI Command Reference <Boolean> OFF - Measurement at source frequency ON - Measurement at receiver frequency *RST value SCPI, Command Types Device-specific, command or query. Example: FREQ:CONV:AWR ON Measure a waves at the receiver frequency.
  • Page 902 ® ® ® R&S ZVA / R&S ZVB / R&S Command Reference SCPI Command Reference Select frequency converter type R&S ZVA-Z110. SYST:COMM:RDEV:GEN1:DEF 'Ext. Gen. 1', 'SME02', 'gpib0', '21' Configure an R&S SME02 generator as external generator no. 1, assigning the name Ext.
  • Page 903 ® ® ® R&S ZVA / R&S ZVB / R&S Command Reference SCPI Command Reference [SENSe<Ch>:]FREQuency:CONVersion:DEVice:PCOefficient<Port>:DEFault <Boolean> Enables or disables default power coefficients for frequency converters R&S ZVA-ZxxxE. This is a global setting. <Ch> Channel number. This suffix is ignored, the command affects all channels.
  • Page 904 ® ® ® R&S ZVA / R&S ZVB / R&S Command Reference SCPI Command Reference [SENSe<Ch>:]FREQuency:CONVersion:HARMonic:ORDer <order> Selects the order of the harmonic measured if a harmonic measurement is enabled HARMonic). ([SENSe<Ch>:]FREQuency:CONVersion <Ch> Channel number. <order> Order of the harmonic, integer multiple of the fundamental frequency measured.
  • Page 905 ® ® ® R&S ZVA / R&S ZVB / R&S Command Reference SCPI Command Reference [SENSe<Ch>:]FREQuency:CONVersion:HARMonic:SPORt <port_no> | <ext. gen. no.> Selects the source port for the harmonic measurement. <Ch> Channel number. <port_no> Positive integer analyzer port number. <ext. gen. no.>...
  • Page 906 ® ® ® R&S ZVA / R&S ZVB / R&S Command Reference SCPI Command Reference [SENSe<Ch>:]FREQuency:CONVersion:MIXer:LOFixed)  [SENSe<Ch>:]FREQuency:CONVersion:MIXer:RFMultiplier  [SENSe<Ch>:]FREQuency:CONVersion:MIXer:RFPort  [SENSe<Ch>:]FREQuency:CONVersion:MIXer:STAGes  [SENSe<Ch>:]FREQuency:CONVersion:MIXer:TFRequency<Stg>  SOURce<Ch>:FREQuency<Pt>:CONVersion:MIXer:PMFixed (replaces SOURce<Ch>:FREQuency<Pt>:CONVersion:MIXer:PFIXed and SOURce<Ch>:FREQuency<Pt>:CONVersion:MIXer:PAFixed)  SOURce<Ch>:FREQuency<Pt>:CONVersion:MIXer:PMODe [SENSe<Ch>:]FREQuency:CONVersion:MIXer:AEXTernal NONE | <gen_number> Selects an external generator as a signal source for the Aux LO signal in a vector mixer measurement (option R&S ZVA-K5).
  • Page 907 ® ® ® R&S ZVA / R&S ZVB / R&S Command Reference SCPI Command Reference <Ch> Channel number <port_number> Analyzer port number 1 or 2 Range [def. unit] 1 or 2 *RST value SCPI, Command Types Device-specific, command or query Example: SOURce<Ch>:FREQuency:CONVersion:MIXer:PAFixed...
  • Page 908 ® ® ® R&S ZVA / R&S ZVB / R&S Command Reference SCPI Command Reference LO | LO1 – local oscillator signal no. 1 LO2 – local oscillator signal no. 2, for 2-stage mixer measurements ([SENSe<Ch>:]FREQuency:CONVersion:MIXer:STAGes) IF – mixer output signal...
  • Page 909 ® ® ® R&S ZVA / R&S ZVB / R&S Command Reference SCPI Command Reference Query the fixed frequency and the signal assignment using the alternative commands. The response is 1000000000;IF. [SENSe<Ch>:]FREQuency:CONVersion:MIXer:IFPort <port_number> Selects an analyzer port as receive port for the IF signal.
  • Page 910 ® ® ® R&S ZVA / R&S ZVB / R&S Command Reference SCPI Command Reference <Ch> Channel number <fixed_frequency> Fixed frequency Range [def. unit] Depending on the instrument model [Hz]. The increment (parameters UP or DOWN) is 0.1 kHz. *RST value...
  • Page 911 ® ® ® R&S ZVA / R&S ZVB / R&S Command Reference SCPI Command Reference <denominator> Range [def. unit] 1, 2, 3 ... [1] *RST value SCPI, Command Device-specific, command or query Types Example: [SENSe<Ch>:]FREQuency:CONVersion:MIXer:MFFixed [SENSe<Ch>:]FREQuency:CONVersion:MIXer:LOPort<Stg> NONE | EMBedded | PORT, <port_number>...
  • Page 912 ® ® ® R&S ZVA / R&S ZVB / R&S Command Reference SCPI Command Reference DOWN) is 0.1 kHz. *RST value Minimum of the analyzer's frequency range, f SCPI, Command Device-specific, command or query Types Example: The following example assume a four-port analyzer with independent source ports no.
  • Page 913 ® ® ® R&S ZVA / R&S ZVB / R&S Command Reference SCPI Command Reference <Ch> Channel number ON | OFF – enable or disable RF image measurement. <Boolean> *RST value SCPI, Command Types Device-specific, command or query Example: [SENSe<Ch>:]FREQuency:CONVersion:MIXer:MFFixed [SENSe<Ch>:]FREQuency:CONVersion:MIXer:RFFixed <fixed_frequency>...
  • Page 914 ® ® ® R&S ZVA / R&S ZVB / R&S Command Reference SCPI Command Reference [SENSe<Ch>:]FREQuency:CONVersion:MIXer:RFPort <port_number> Selects an analyzer port as source port for the RF signal. For mixer delay measurements and vector mixer measurements (options R&S ZVA-K5, R&S ZVA-K9, R&S ZVA-K10), the RF signal must be generated at port 1.
  • Page 915 ® ® ® R&S ZVA / R&S ZVB / R&S Command Reference SCPI Command Reference Example: *RST; FREQ:CONV:MIX:LOF 3 GHz Reset the analyzer and specify a fixed frequency of 1 GHz, to be assigned to the LO signal. FREQ:STAR 1 GHz; STOP 2 GHz Define a sweep range between 3 and 4 GHz, to be assigned to the RF signal.
  • Page 916 ® ® ® R&S ZVA / R&S ZVB / R&S Command Reference SCPI Command Reference [SENSe<Ch>:]FREQuency:LPNoise <Boolean> Enables or disables the Low Phase Noise function. The "Low Phase Noise" function is only available for older synthesizer generations with coupled test ports.
  • Page 917 ® ® ® R&S ZVA / R&S ZVB / R&S Command Reference SCPI Command Reference [SENSe<Ch>:]FREQuency<Pt>:OFFSet:PWAVes <offset> Defines the constant receiver frequency offset for primed wave quantities relative to the common receiver frequency. <Ch> Channel number. <Pt> Test port number of the analyzer.
  • Page 918 ® ® ® R&S ZVA / R&S ZVB / R&S Command Reference SCPI Command Reference <Ch> Channel number. POSitive The LO frequency is always above the measured RF frequency. NEGative The LO frequency is always below the measured RF frequency.
  • Page 919 ® ® ® R&S ZVA / R&S ZVB / R&S Command Reference SCPI Command Reference ([SENSe<Ch>:]FREQuency:STOP), the stop frequency is set to the start frequency plus the minimum frequency span ([SENSe<Ch>:]FREQuency:SPAN). [SENSe<Ch>:]FREQuency:STOP <stop_frequency> Defines the stop frequency for a frequency sweep which is equal to the right edge of a Cartesian diagram.
  • Page 920 ® ® ® R&S ZVA / R&S ZVB / R&S Command Reference SCPI Command Reference Types Example: *RST; FREQ:IMOD:LTON PORT,1 Select port 1 as a source port for the lower tone. FREQ:IMOD:UTON PORT,3 Select port 3 as a source port for the upper tone.
  • Page 921 ® ® ® R&S ZVA / R&S ZVB / R&S Command Reference SCPI Command Reference FREQ:IMOD:TDIS 2E6 Select a tone distance of 2 MHz. FREQ:IMOD:ORD3 ON; ORD5 ON; ORD7 OFF; ORD9 OFF Enable the measurement of the intermodulation products up to the 5 order.
  • Page 922 ® ® ® R&S ZVA / R&S ZVB / R&S Command Reference SCPI Command Reference [SENSe<Ch>:]FREQuency:IMODulation:RECeiver <port no.> Selects the receiver port for the intermodulation measurement. <Ch> Channel number. <port no.> Analyzer port number Range [def. unit] 1 to the number of ports of the analyzer. [–]...
  • Page 923 ® ® ® R&S ZVA / R&S ZVB / R&S Command Reference SCPI Command Reference Select 5 as the maximum IM order for the intermodulation spectrum measurement. SENS2:FREQ:IMOD:SPEC ON Enable the intermodulation spectrum measurement for the new channel no. 2.
  • Page 924 ® ® ® R&S ZVA / R&S ZVB / R&S Command Reference SCPI Command Reference Configuration – External Generators dialog. <source_no> Number of the port for the internal source or of the generator Range [def. unit] 1 to port number of the analyzer/number of external generators [–] –...
  • Page 925 ® ® ® R&S ZVA / R&S ZVB / R&S Command Reference SCPI Command Reference instruments equipped with the necessary options). (Perform mixer delay measurement, evaluate results.) FREQ:MDELay:CONV OFF Disable mixer delay measurement, switch back to normal (non frequency- converting) mode.
  • Page 926 ® ® ® R&S ZVA / R&S ZVB / R&S Command Reference SCPI Command Reference option - for network analyzers R&S ZVT20 that are equipped with option R&S ZVT20-B11 The internal combiner requires the following port configuration: Lower Tone: Port 1, Upper Tone: Port 3.
  • Page 927 ® ® ® R&S ZVA / R&S ZVB / R&S Command Reference SCPI Command Reference ON | OFF – Enable / disable division <Boolean> *RST value SCPI, Command Types Device-specific, command or query. Example: MMEMory:LOAD:MDCData [SENSe<Ch>:]FREQuency:MDELay:RECeiver INTernal | EXTernal Selects the measurement setup/receiver configuration for the mixer delay measurement.
  • Page 928 ® ® ® R&S ZVA / R&S ZVB / R&S Command Reference SCPI Command Reference SCPI, Command Device-specific, command or query. Types Example: [SENSe<Ch>:]FREQuency:IMODulation:LTONe [SENSe<Chn>:]FUNCtion... This subsystem selects the sweep type and the measurement parameter. [SENSe<Chn>:]FUNCtion[:ON] '<string>' [Deprecated command] Defines the sweep type and the measurement parameter in a single string.
  • Page 929 ® ® ® R&S ZVA / R&S ZVB / R&S Command Reference SCPI Command Reference Output: A<Pt >/B<Pt > POWer:A<Pt > Wave quantity with stimulus port number of the analyzer, e.g. A1. POWer:B<Pt > Wave quantity with receive port number of the analyzer, e.g. B2.
  • Page 930 ® ® ® R&S ZVA / R&S ZVB / R&S Command Reference SCPI Command Reference *RST value SCPI, Command Device-specific, command or query Types Example: LOM1 OFF; LOR1 OFF Switch the local oscillators for the measurement channel b and the reference channel a at port no.
  • Page 931 ® ® ® R&S ZVA / R&S ZVB / R&S Command Reference SCPI Command Reference <Ch> Channel number. If unspecified the numeric suffix is set to 1. <log_port> Logical port number. The logical ports must be defined using SOURce<Ch>:LPORt<log_port> <phys_port1>,<phys_port2>. An n port analyzer supports a maximum of n/2 (n even) or (n –...
  • Page 932 ® ® ® R&S ZVA / R&S ZVB / R&S Command Reference SCPI Command Reference is measured. *RST value SCPI, Command Device-specific, command or query Types Example: Noise Figure Measurement (condensed programming examples) [SENSe<Ch>:]NFIGure:RFICorr <Boolean> Enables or disables the RF image correction for mixer noise figure measurements.
  • Page 933 ® ® ® R&S ZVA / R&S ZVB / R&S Command Reference SCPI Command Reference Range [def. unit] -3.4028234664E+038 W/V to +3.4028234664E+038 W/V [W/V]. *RST value 0 W/V SCPI, Command Device-specific, command or query Types Example: *RST; CALC:PAR:MEAS "TRC1", "PAE21"...
  • Page 934 ® ® ® R&S ZVA / R&S ZVB / R&S Command Reference SCPI Command Reference SCPI, Command Device-specific, command or query Types Example: [SENSe<Chn>:]PAE:C [SENSe<Ch>:]PMMO This subsystem controls the sensitivity correction of the external power meter which is used for a source power calibration.
  • Page 935 ® ® ® R&S ZVA / R&S ZVB / R&S Command Reference SCPI Command Reference Example: PORT2:ZREF 52, 2 Specify a complex reference impedance of 52 Ω + j * 2 Ω for the (physical) port no. 2. CALC:TRAN:IMP:RNOR PWAV Select renormalization of port impedances according to the power waves theory.
  • Page 936 ® ® ® R&S ZVA / R&S ZVB / R&S Command Reference SCPI Command Reference AUTO – Adaptive Gain Control according to the RF input level Parameters LNOise – Fixed, large IF gain, for low input levels LDIStortion – Fixed, small IF gain, for high input levels...
  • Page 937 ® ® ® R&S ZVA / R&S ZVB / R&S Command Reference SCPI Command Reference generator signal. This suffix must be set to 1, the chopped pulse profile mode is general. ON | OFF – Enable or disable chopped pulse profile settings <Boolean>...
  • Page 938 ® ® ® R&S ZVA / R&S ZVB / R&S Command Reference SCPI Command Reference [SENSe<Ch>:]PULSe:GENerator<gen_no>:DINCrement <Increment> Defines a delay increment for the sync signal in chopped pulse profile mode. The delay increment defines the distance between two measurement intervals (sweep points). For sweep point no. n, the total delay of the sync signal relative to the pulse generator signal is <Delay>...
  • Page 939 ® ® ® R&S ZVA / R&S ZVB / R&S Command Reference SCPI Command Reference CSPecific – Channel-specific pulse generator settings Parameters CONTinuous – The settings of the master channel (set via [SENSe<Ch>:]PULSe:GENerator<gen_no>:MCHannel <Channel>) are used for all channels; continuous pulse generator signal on a channel change...
  • Page 940 ® ® ® R&S ZVA / R&S ZVB / R&S Command Reference SCPI Command Reference [SENSe<Ch>:]PULSe:GENerator<gen_no>[:STATe] <Boolean> Turns the pulse generator on or off. <Ch> Channel number. <gen_no> Number of the pulse generator signal. This parameter is ignored, the setting affects both signals.
  • Page 941 ® ® ® R&S ZVA / R&S ZVB / R&S Command Reference SCPI Command Reference SENS1:PULS:GEN:TRA:PER 1 us Define a pulse train period of 1000 ns. SENS1:PULS:GEN:TRA:DATA DEF, DEF, DEF, 0, 2.5E-8, 5E-8 Define and enable a pulse train segment with an active pulse between 0 s and 12.5 ns.
  • Page 942 ® ® ® R&S ZVA / R&S ZVB / R&S Command Reference SCPI Command Reference SCPI, Device-specific, command or query Command Types Example: [SENSe<Ch>:]PULSe:GENerator<gen_no>:TRAin:DATA [SENSe<Ch>:]PULSe:GENerator<gen_no>:TRAin:SEGMent<Seg>:COUNt? Queries the number of pulse train segments. <Ch> Channel number <gen_no> Number of the pulse generator signal. This suffix must be set to 1, since the command affects the pulse generator signal only.
  • Page 943 ® ® ® R&S ZVA / R&S ZVB / R&S Command Reference SCPI Command Reference <Ch> Channel number <gen_no> Number of the pulse generator signal. This suffix must be set to 1, since the command affects the pulse generator signal only.
  • Page 944 ® ® ® R&S ZVA / R&S ZVB / R&S Command Reference SCPI Command Reference *RST value SINGle (for both signals) SCPI, Command Device-specific, command or query Types Example: [SENSe<Ch>:]PULSe:GENerator<gen_no>:TRAin:DATA [SENSe<Ch>:]PULSe:GENerator<gen_no>:WIDTh <Width> Defines the pulse width of the pulse generator signal <gen_no>.
  • Page 945 ® ® ® R&S ZVA / R&S ZVB / R&S Command Reference SCPI Command Reference Select pulse profile mode and activate coupled section limits. SENS2:PULS:REC:A1:SRCP1:EVAL:STAR 200 ns Create channel 2 and define a start value of 200 ns for the averaging section for the a receiver and source port no.
  • Page 946 ® ® ® R&S ZVA / R&S ZVB / R&S Command Reference SCPI Command Reference [SENSe<Ch>:]PULSe:RECeiver:A<rec_no>:GENerator<gen_no>:EVALuation:STA Rt <section_start> Defines the start time of the averaging section for the wave quantity assigned to the reference receiver <rec_no> and the external generator <gen_no>.
  • Page 947 ® ® ® R&S ZVA / R&S ZVB / R&S Command Reference SCPI Command Reference <rec_no> Number of the reference receiver (= port number of the analyzer). Values range from 1 to the total number of test ports. <gen_no> Number of a previously configured external generator ON | OFF –...
  • Page 948 ® ® ® R&S ZVA / R&S ZVB / R&S Command Reference SCPI Command Reference Types Example: PULS:REC:A2:SRCP2:EVAL:STAR 200 ns; STOP 500 ns Specify the averaging section for the a receiver and the analyzer source port no. 2: Define a start value of 200 ns and a stop value of 500 ns.
  • Page 949 ® ® ® R&S ZVA / R&S ZVB / R&S Command Reference SCPI Command Reference of the averaging section must be between 25 ns and 3 s. *RST value SCPI, Command Device-specific, command or query Types Example: [SENSe<Ch>:]PULSe:RECeiver:A<rec_no>:SRCPort<gen_no>:EVALuation:MODE [SENSe<Ch>:]PULSe:RECeiver:A<rec_no>:SRCPort<port_no>:LINes[:STATe] <Boolean>...
  • Page 950 ® ® ® R&S ZVA / R&S ZVB / R&S Command Reference SCPI Command Reference E NORMal | MEAN Specifies whether the wave quantity assigned to the measurement receiver <rec_no> and the external generator <gen_no> is displayed as measured or whether it is averaged.
  • Page 951 ® ® ® R&S ZVA / R&S ZVB / R&S Command Reference SCPI Command Reference Types Example: [SENSe<Ch>:]PULSe:RECeiver:B<rec_no>:GENerator<gen_no>:EVALuation:MODE [SENSe<Ch>:]PULSe:RECeiver:B<rec_no>:GENerator<gen_no>:EVALuation:STO P <section_stop> Defines the stop time of the averaging section for the wave quantity assigned to the measurement receiver <rec_no> and the external generator <gen_no>.
  • Page 952 ® ® ® R&S ZVA / R&S ZVB / R&S Command Reference SCPI Command Reference [SENSe<Ch>:]PULSe:RECeiver:B<rec_no>:GENerator<gen_no>:TRIGger:DELay <shift_stimulus> Defines an offset time (shift stimulus) for the wave quantity assigned to the measurement receiver <rec_no> and the external generator <gen_no>. <Ch> Channel number <rec_no>...
  • Page 953 ® ® ® R&S ZVA / R&S ZVB / R&S Command Reference SCPI Command Reference [SENSe<Ch>:]PULSe:RECeiver:B<rec_no>:SRCPort<port_no>:EVALuation:STARt <section_start> Defines the start time of the averaging section for the wave quantity assigned to the measurement receiver <rec_no> and the analyzer source port <port_no>.
  • Page 954 ® ® ® R&S ZVA / R&S ZVB / R&S Command Reference SCPI Command Reference <rec_no> Number of the measurement receiver (= port number of the analyzer). Values range from 1 to the total number of test ports. <port_no> Number of the analyzer source port. 1 to the total number of test ports.
  • Page 955 ® ® ® R&S ZVA / R&S ZVB / R&S Command Reference SCPI Command Reference Select pulse profile mode and select an IF bandwidth of 5 MHz. PULS:TIME:STAR -10 us; STOP 200 us Select a displayed time range between –10 μs and +200 μs.
  • Page 956 ® ® ® R&S ZVA / R&S ZVB / R&S Command Reference SCPI Command Reference set to any value. INTernal Select internal 10 MHz reference oscillator. EXTernal Select external reference clock. The frequency of the external reference clock is specified via [SENSe<Chn>:]ROSCillator:EXTernal:FREQuency.
  • Page 957 ® ® ® R&S ZVA / R&S ZVB / R&S Command Reference SCPI Command Reference [SENSe<Ch>:]SEGMent<Seg>:INSert to create a segment with specific channel settings. <Ch> Channel number If unspecified the numeric suffix is set to 1. <Seg> Sweep segment number. Segment numbers must be sequential. If n segments already exist, the added segment must have the segment number n+1.
  • Page 958 ® ® ® R&S ZVA / R&S ZVB / R&S Command Reference SCPI Command Reference <Ch> Channel number <Seg> Sweep segment number. This suffix is ignored; the setting controls the whole segmented sweep. <Boolean> ON: Use independent bandwidth settings, to be defined via [SENSe<Ch>:]SEGMent<Seg>:BWIDth[:RESolution].
  • Page 959 ® ® ® R&S ZVA / R&S ZVB / R&S Command Reference SCPI Command Reference [SENSe<Ch>:]SEGMent<Seg>:BWIDth[:RESolution]:SELect:CONTrol <Boolean> Selects common or independent Selectivity settings for the sweep segments. <Ch> Channel number <Seg> Sweep segment number. This suffix is ignored; the setting controls the whole segmented sweep.
  • Page 960 ® ® ® R&S ZVA / R&S ZVB / R&S Command Reference SCPI Command Reference – *RST value SCPI, Command Device-specific, query only. Types Example: SEGM:ADD Create a new sweep segment no. 1 in channel no. 1 using default settings.
  • Page 961 ® ® ® R&S ZVA / R&S ZVB / R&S Command Reference SCPI Command Reference unit] setting in the segment, which is equivalent to the minimum sweep time possible. <Point Delay for each partial measurement in the segment. See [SENSe<Ch>:]SEGMent<Seg>:SWEep:DWELl. In the setting Delay>...
  • Page 962 ® ® ® R&S ZVA / R&S ZVB / R&S Command Reference SCPI Command Reference Example: SEGM:DEF:SEL DWEL Select the meas. delay to determine the sweep time in a new sweep segment. SEGM:DEF 1MHZ, 1.5MHZ, 111, -21DBM, 0.01S, 0, 10KHZ Create a sweep segment with a sweep range between 1.0 MHz and 1.5 MHz...
  • Page 963 ® ® ® R&S ZVA / R&S ZVB / R&S Command Reference SCPI Command Reference [SENSe<Ch>:]SEGMent<Seg>:FREQuency:CENTer? Returns the center frequency of sweep segment no. <Seg>. <Ch> Channel number <Seg> Sweep segment number Response Center frequency of the sweep. Range [def. unit]...
  • Page 964 ® ® ® R&S ZVA / R&S ZVB / R&S Command Reference SCPI Command Reference [SENSe<Ch>:]SEGMent<Seg>:FREQuency:STOP. [SENSe<Ch>:]SEGMent<Seg>:FREQuency:STARt <Start> Defines the Start frequency of sweep segment no. <Seg>. <Ch> Channel number <Seg> Sweep segment number <Start> Start frequency of the sweep.
  • Page 965 ® ® ® R&S ZVA / R&S ZVB / R&S Command Reference SCPI Command Reference minus the minimum frequency span ([SENSe<Ch>:]SEGMent<Seg>:FREQuency:SPAN). [SENSe<Ch>:]SEGMent<Seg>:INSert <Start>,<Stop>,<Points>,<Power>,<Time>|<Point Delay>,<Unused>,<Meas. Bandwidth>[,<LO>,<Selectivity>] Adds a new sweep segment with specific channel settings. Entry of the first seven numeric parameters is mandatory; no default values are provided. All settings can be changed for existing segments using other commands of the [SENSe<Ch>:]SEGMent<Seg>...
  • Page 966 ® ® ® R&S ZVA / R&S ZVB / R&S Command Reference SCPI Command Reference <Unused> <Meas. Resolution bandwidth in the segment. See [SENSe<Ch>:]SEGMent<Seg>:BWIDth[:RESolution]. Bandwidth> Range [def. 1.0E-6 Hz to 5 MHz [Hz]. unit] <LO> Position of the local oscillator frequency LO relative to the RF frequency (Spur Avoid).
  • Page 967 ® ® ® R&S ZVA / R&S ZVB / R&S Command Reference SCPI Command Reference Query the sweep time in the new segment. [SENSe<Ch>:]SEGMent<Seg>:NAME '<segment_name>' Defines the Name of the sweep segment no. <Seg>. <Ch> Channel number <Seg> Sweep segment number '<segment_name>'...
  • Page 968 ® ® ® R&S ZVA / R&S ZVB / R&S Command Reference SCPI Command Reference [SENSe<Ch>:]SEGMent<Seg>:POWer[:LEVel] <Power> Defines the Power of the internal signal source in sweep segment no. <Seg>. At the same time, the command activates separate power control in all sweep segments ON).
  • Page 969 ® ® ® R&S ZVA / R&S ZVB / R&S Command Reference SCPI Command Reference Couple the power levels in all segments and reset the power in segment no. 1 to the initial value. [SENSe<Ch>:]SEGMent<Seg>:SBANd AUTO | POSitive | NEGative Defines the position of the local oscillator frequency LO relative to the RF frequency (sideband, Spur Avoid) in sweep segment no.
  • Page 970 ® ® ® R&S ZVA / R&S ZVB / R&S Command Reference SCPI Command Reference [SENSe<Ch>:]SEGMent<Seg>[:STATe] <Boolean> Activates or deactivates the sweep segment <Seg>. Sweep points belonging to inactive segments only are not measured <Ch> Channel number <Seg> Sweep segment number <Boolean>...
  • Page 971 ® ® ® R&S ZVA / R&S ZVB / R&S Command Reference SCPI Command Reference [SENSe<Ch>:]SEGMent<Seg>:SWEep:DWELl:CONTrol <Boolean> Selects common or independent Meas. Delay settings for the sweep segments. <Ch> Channel number <Seg> Sweep segment number. This suffix is ignored; the setting controls the whole segmented sweep.
  • Page 972 ® ® ® R&S ZVA / R&S ZVB / R&S Command Reference SCPI Command Reference [SENSe<Ch>:]SEGMent<Seg>:SWEep:TIME <Sweep Time> Sets the duration of the sweep in sweep segment no. <Seg> (Segment Sweep Time). At the same time, the command activates separate sweep time setting in all sweep segments ON).
  • Page 973 ® ® ® R&S ZVA / R&S ZVB / R&S Command Reference SCPI Command Reference SCPI, Device-specific, command or query Command Types Example: SEGM:ADD Create a new sweep segment no. 1 in channel no. 1. SEGM:SWE:TIME 0.1 Increase the segment sweep time to 0.1 s.
  • Page 974 ® ® ® R&S ZVA / R&S ZVB / R&S Command Reference SCPI Command Reference Example: [SENSe<Ch>:]SEGMent<Seg>:TRIGger:STATe [SENSe<Ch>:]SEGMent<Seg>:TRIGger:STATe <Boolean> Deactivates/activates triggering for segment <Seg>. This setting only takes effect if 1. the analyzer is not in Free Run mode (see TRIGger<Ch>[:SEQuence]:SOURce) 2.
  • Page 975 ® ® R&S ZVA / R&S ZVB / R&S Command Reference SCPI Command Reference This command is particularly useful in arbitrary mode (with option R&S ZVA-K4), where the frequencies and source power levels at the ports are independent. For R&S ZVA analyzers without option R&S ZVA-K4, all frequencies are coupled so that this selection has no effect.
  • Page 976 ® ® ® R&S ZVA / R&S ZVB / R&S Command Reference SCPI Command Reference [SENSe<Ch>:]SWEep:AXIS:POWer '<power_ref>' Selects the stimulus signal that is used for the definition of the power sweep range or fixed power. This command is particularly useful in arbitrary mode (with option R&S ZVA-K4), where the frequencies and source power levels at the ports are independent.
  • Page 977 ® ® ® R&S ZVA / R&S ZVB / R&S Command Reference SCPI Command Reference [SENSe<Ch>:]SWEep:COUNt <No_of_Sweeps> Defines the number of sweeps to be measured in single sweep mode (INITiate<Ch>:CONTinuous OFF). <Ch> Channel number. If the single sweep mode settings apply to all channels (INITiate<Ch>[:IMMediate]:SCOPe ALL), this suffix is ignored;...
  • Page 978 ® ® ® R&S ZVA / R&S ZVB / R&S Command Reference SCPI Command Reference SCPI, Confirmed, command or query Command Types Example: FUNC "XFR:POW:S12" Activate a frequency sweep and select the S-parameter S12 as measured parameter for channel and trace no. 1.
  • Page 979 ® ® ® R&S ZVA / R&S ZVB / R&S Command Reference SCPI Command Reference [SENSe<Ch>:]SWEep:TYPE Note: Use to select sweep types other than Lin. Frequency or Log. Frequency. <Ch> Channel number. LINear The stimulus frequency is swept in equidistant steps over the frequency range.
  • Page 980 ® ® ® R&S ZVA / R&S ZVB / R&S Command Reference SCPI Command Reference This setting is valid for sweep types with equidistant sweep points only. It does not apply to logarithmic and segmented sweeps. <Ch> Channel number. <step_size>...
  • Page 981 ® ® ® R&S ZVA / R&S ZVB / R&S Command Reference SCPI Command Reference SWE:TIME 2 Increase the total sweep time to 2 s. SWE:DWEL? Query the meas. delay for each partial measurement again. The delay is increased by 1 s divided by the total number of partial measurements per sweep.
  • Page 982 ® ® ® R&S ZVA / R&S ZVB / R&S Command Reference SCPI Command Reference is swept in linear, equidistant steps over a continuous range (SOURce<Ch>:POWer<Pt>:STARt, SOURce<Ch>:POWer<Pt>:STOP). In a Cartesian diagram, the x-axis is a dB-linear power axis. Time sweep. The measurement is performed at constant frequency (SOURce<Ch>:FREQuency<Pt>:CW|FIXed) and source power...
  • Page 983 ® ® ® R&S ZVA / R&S ZVB / R&S Command Reference SCPI Command Reference [SENSe<Ch>:]TEUNit:COMBiner<Path>[:STATe] <Boolean> Switches the internal combiner in-between RF signal paths 1 and 3 or 2 and 4 (source path). <Ch> Channel number. If unspecified, this parameter is set to 1.
  • Page 984 ® ® ® R&S ZVA / R&S ZVB / R&S Command Reference SCPI Command Reference Example: TEUN:LNAM1 ON Switch low noise amplifier into receive path 1 [SENSe<Ch>:]TEUNit:PMODulator<Path>[:STATe] <Boolean> Loops a pulse modulator into the RF signal path no. <Path>. <Ch>...
  • Page 985 ® ® ® R&S ZVA / R&S ZVB / R&S Command Reference SCPI Command Reference If unspecified, this parameter is set to 1. ON – Input is inverted <Boolean> OFF – Input is not inverted *RST value SCPI, Command Types...
  • Page 986 ® ® ® R&S ZVA / R&S ZVB / R&S Command Reference SCPI Command Reference [SENSe<Ch>:]TEUNit:UMEas<Path>[:STATe] <Boolean> Enables/disables the user measurement path extension for RF signal path <Path>. <Ch> Channel number <Path> Signal path no. 1 or 2. If unspecified, this parameter is set to 1.

  • Page 987: Source

    ® ® ® R&S ZVA / R&S ZVB / R&S Command Reference SCPI Command Reference *RST value SCPI, Device-specific, command or query Command Types Example: SENSe2:UDSParams1:ACTive ON Enable user-defined ports for channel no. 2 and port no. 1 SENSe2:UDSParams1:PARam '1:a1:b2' Define a port combining the drive port 1, the reference wave a .
  • Page 988 ® ® ® R&S ZVA / R&S ZVB / R&S Command Reference SCPI Command Reference signal (SOURce<Ch>:CMODe:RPORt). The amplitude replaces the port amplitude (see SOURce<Ch>:POWer<Pt>[:LEVel][:IMMediate][:AMPlitude] and related commands) as long as ON). the port signal is selected as a coherent signal (SOURce<Ch>:CMODe:PORT<Pt>[:STATe]...
  • Page 989 ® ® ® R&S ZVA / R&S ZVB / R&S Command Reference SCPI Command Reference <Ch> Channel number. If unspecified the numeric suffix is set to 1. <Pt> Test port number of the analyzer. <Boolean> Signal is coherent (ON) or non-coherent (OFF).
  • Page 990 ® ® ® R&S ZVA / R&S ZVB / R&S Command Reference SCPI Command Reference Range [def. unit] 0.1 deg to 10 deg *RST value 1 deg SCPI, Command Types Device-specific, command or query Example: SOURce<Ch>:CMODe:TOLerance:AMPlitude <Tolerance> SOURce<Ch>:... This subsystem controls the frequency and power of the internal signal source, configures and starts the source power calibration, and provides output port settings.
  • Page 991 ® ® ® R&S ZVA / R&S ZVB / R&S Command Reference SCPI Command Reference SOURce<Ch>:FREQuency<Pt>:CONVersion:ARBitrary:CFRequency <numerator>, <denominator>, <offset>, CW | FIXed | SWEep Defines the converter source frequency at the converter port <Pt>. This command is available for frequency converters with electronic attenuators R&S ZVA-ZxxxE. The converter source frequency is either a range (for frequency sweeps) or a CW frequency (for power, time and CW Mode sweeps).
  • Page 992 ® ® ® R&S ZVA / R&S ZVB / R&S Command Reference SCPI Command Reference Restrict the base frequency range to 75 GHz to 100 GHz. SOUR:FREQ1:CONV:ARB:IFR 1, 6, 5E+7, SWE Increase the RF source frequency at port 1 by 50 kHz.
  • Page 993 ® ® ® R&S ZVA / R&S ZVB / R&S Command Reference SCPI Command Reference *RST value SWEep SCPI, Command Device-specific, command or query Types Example: *RST; FREQ:STAR 1E+9; STOP 1.1E+9 Reset the analyzer (activating a frequency sweep) and set the sweep range between 1 GHz and 1.1 GHz.
  • Page 994 ® ® ® R&S ZVA / R&S ZVB / R&S Command Reference SCPI Command Reference CW | FIXed – The reduced formula with f = 0 is applied. f = <offset>; the command defines a fixed frequency. *RST value SWEep...
  • Page 995 ® ® ® R&S ZVA / R&S ZVB / R&S Command Reference SCPI Command Reference SCPI, Command Device-specific, command or query. Types Example: *RST; SOUR:FREQ:CONV:MIX:PAF –10 Reset the analyzer and specify a fixed Aux LO power of –10 dBm. SENS:FREQ:CONV:MIX:APOR 1 Select the test setup where the additional mixers MEAS and REF are connected to port 1 of the NWA.
  • Page 996 ® ® ® R&S ZVA / R&S ZVB / R&S Command Reference SCPI Command Reference SOURce<Ch>:FREQuency<Pt>:CONVersion:MIXer:PMFixed RF | LO | LO1 | LO2 | AUXLo | IF, <fixed_power> Assigns a fixed power to the RF, LO 1, LO 2, Aux LO, or to the IF signal.
  • Page 997 ® ® ® R&S ZVA / R&S ZVB / R&S Command Reference SCPI Command Reference SOURce<Ch>:GROup<group_no> <log_port1>,<log_port2> Explicitly defines port group <group_no> as the continuous range of logical ports from <log_port1> to <log_port2>.  Port groups must be non-empty and disjoint; they are always numbered consecutively, starting at ...
  • Page 998 ® ® ® R&S ZVA / R&S ZVB / R&S Command Reference SCPI Command Reference Query the port ranges of groups 1 and 2. The response is 1,2;3,4. SOUR:GRO:CLE ALL; SOUR:GRO:COUN?; SOUR:GRO1? Dissolve all port groups and query for existing port groups.
  • Page 999 ® ® ® R&S ZVA / R&S ZVB / R&S Command Reference SCPI Command Reference  After a CLEar [ALL] or after the last restricted group has been dissolved, only group 1 exists and is unrestricted (i.e. consists of all available ports) <Ch>...
  • Page 1000 ® ® ® R&S ZVA / R&S ZVB / R&S Command Reference SCPI Command Reference <Ch> Channel number. <group_no> Port group number. In "set" direction this suffix is ignored. Range [def. unit] As port groups must be non-empty and disjoint, the maximum number of port groups for an n-port analyzer is n.

This manual is also suitable for:

ZvaZvt

Table of Contents

Save PDF